064-A102-06-0050
50018 SCANDICCI (FI) - ITALY
Via delle Nazioni Unite, 1
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
   
SPANISH
Tel .: (055) 72911 - Fax: (055) 720471  
Telex: 570203 BICOMA I   10/99

TO KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE  

 Page

INDEX ___ ____________ ____________ i-1

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______

0. IMPORTANT RECOMMENDATIONS _________________________________________________________________ ____________ 0-1

______

0-1
0.1 CONSULTATION OF THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL _____________________________________ ____________ ______
0.2 GENERAL RULES FOR PERSONNEL SAFETY 0-1
MANAGER
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________
______
0-3
0.3 GENERAL RULES FOR USING THE MACHINE ____________________________ ____________ ______

1-1
1. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS _____________________________________________________________________________________
____________ ______
1-1
1-2
1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________ ______ 1-6
1.1 GENERAL DATA _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1-8
____________ ______
1.2 COMPOSITION OF THE MACHINE ___________________________________________________________________________________ 1-9
____________ ______
1.3 BASE ARTICLES _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1-9
____________ ______
1-9
1.4 BUILDABLE MESH LINKS ___________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
1.5 EFFECTIVE SIZES ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________
______
1.6 MODIFICATIONS
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
2-1

2-1
2. INSTALLATION 2-1
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
2-1
2.1 MODALITY OF MACHINE ISSUANCE ____________________________________________ ____________ ______ 2-2
2.2 STORAGE ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ 2-3
______
2-3
2.3 PACKAGING
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 2-4
2.4 POSITIONING TO THE FLOOR ____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2-4
____________ ______
2.5 LEVELING
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
2.6 ASSEMBLY OF SEPARATE GROUPS _______________________________________________________________________________ 2-5
____________ ______
2.7 GENERAL CONTROLS __________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________ ______ 2-6
2.8 REMOVAL OF THE ANTIOXIDE MIXTURE ____________________________________________________________________ 2-7
____________ ______
2.9 FILLING THE LUBRICATOR AND CHECKING THE LEVEL 2-7
OIL IN TRANSMISSION CASE ________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 2-8
2.10 CONNECTION TO A CENTRALIZED INSTALLATION
FROM COMPRESSED AIR
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
2.11 CONNECTION TO A CENTRALIZED SUCTION INSTALLATION ____________ ______ 3-1
2.12 CONNECTION TO ELECTRICAL LINE ______________________________________________________________________________
____________ ______
2.13 CONNECTION TO THE VIDEO TERMINAL OR TO THE COMPUTER ________________________ 3-1
____________ ______
3-2

3-3
3. OPERATIONAL COMMANDS AND PROGRAMMING ____________________________________ 3-4
____________ ______ 3-6
3-8
3.1 EXTERNAL PART ELECTRIC CABINET ____________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
3.2 CONTROL BOARD ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________
______

3.2.1 Buttons
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
3.2.2 Operating Keyboard
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______
3.2.3 Programming Keypad _______________________________________________________________________________________________
____________ ______
3.2.4 Signal Series ______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________
 i-1

Page
 

3.3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES ____________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 3-9

3.3.1 Keypad Programming Procedures ____________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 3-9

3.3.1.1 Main Blocks ___________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 3-11

3.3.1.1.1 Function “011” → of “Select Procedure ...”
Function “2” Æ for “Direct Activation” ______________________________ ______ 3-11
3.3.1.1.2 Function “030” Æ of “Select Procedure ...”
Function “3” Æ of “Operating Machine” _________________________________ ______ 3-13
3.3.1.1.3 Function “031” ___ 3-14
______________________________________________________________________________________________ ______

3.3.1.2 Menu of Operational Functions ___________________________________________________________ ____________ 3-15

______
3-15
3.3.1.2.1 Function “400” 3-16
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.2.2 Function “420” 3-16
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-17
3.3.1.2.3 Function “430”
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-17
3.3.1.2.4 Function “450”
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-18
3.3.1.2.5 Function “460”
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-18
3.3.1.3 Machine Status Information ________________________________________________________________ ____________ 3-18
______
3-20
3.3.1.3.1 Function “050” 3-20
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.3.2 Function “051” 3-21
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.3.3 Function “052” 3-22
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.3.4 Function “053”
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-22
3.3.1.4 Reserved Functions ____________________________________________________________________________________ 3-23
____________ ______ 3-30
3.3.1.4.1 Function “100” 3-32
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3-37
3.3.1.4.1.1 Function “101” 3-38
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.1.2 Function “102” 3-42
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.1.3 Function “103” 3-42
_____________________________________________________________________________
3-44
3.3.1.4.2 Function “110” 3-47
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.4.3 Function “120” 3-48
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-51
3.3.1.4.4 Function “130” 3-51
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.4.5 Function “140” 3-52
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______

3.3.1.4.5.1 Function “141” 3-53

_____________________________________________________________________________ 3-57
3.3.1.4.5.2 Function “142”
_____________________________________________________________________________ 3-57
3.3.1.4.5.3 Function “143”
_____________________________________________________________________________ 3-58
3.3.1.4.5.4 Function “144” 3-59
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.5.5 Function “146” 3-60
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.5.6 Function “147”
_____________________________________________________________________________ 3-61
3.3.1.4.5.7 Function “148” 3-61
_____________________________________________________________________________
3-62
3.3.1.4.6 Function “150” 3-63
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______
3.3.1.4.7 Function “160” 3-65
_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______ 3-66
3.3.1.4.7.1 Function “161”
_____________________________________________________________________________ 3-67
3.3.1.4.7.2 Function “162”
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.7.3 Function “163”
_____________________________________________________________________________

3.3.1.4.8 Function “170”

_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______

3.3.1.4.8.1 Function “171”

_____________________________________________________________________________
 3.3.1.4.8.2 Function “172”
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.8.3 Function “173”
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.8.4 Function “174”
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.8.5 Function “175”
_____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.4.8.6 Function “176”
_____________________________________________________________________________

3.3.1.4.9 Function “999”

_________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______

i-2

       

3.3.1.5 Machine Connection to LWS Monitoring System _________________

   

     
3.3.1.5.1 Function “104” _____________________________________________________________________________
3.3.1.5.2 Function “32” _______________________________________________________________________________
     
     
3.3.1.5.3 Function “180” _____________________________________________________________________________

3.3.1.6 Error Messages Relating to Keypad Programming ___

   

3.3.2 Editor Programming Procedure Items / Sizes _______________

 

3.3.2.1 Listing Items / sizes _____________________________________________________________________________

   
3.3.2.2 Listing Drawings _____________________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.2.3 Cancellation Items / sizes _________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.2.4 Cancellation Drawings _________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.2.5 Editing Article / Original Size ______________________________________________________________
   

3.3.2.5.1 Zone Selection Menu (Original Artic

     

3.3.2.6 Editing Item / Size of Existing ____________________________________________________

   

3.3.2.6.1 Zones Selection Menu ( Finished I

     

3.3.2.7 Modification Item / Size ____________________________________________________________________

   
3.3.2.8 Modification Article / Size in Execution ______________________________________
   

3.3.2.8.1 Definition Typologies ______________________________________________________________

     
3.3.2.8.2 Speed Programming _______________________________________________________
     
     
3.3.2.8.3 Programming Stop Sensors ______________________________________
      3.3.2.8.4 Yarn Map Programming _______________________________________________
     
3.3.2.8.5 Tarature Mesh Width Coefficients __________________________________
3.3.2.8.6 Length / Width Programming _________________________________________________
     
3.3.2.8.7 Thread guide programming ________________________________________________________
     
     
3.3.2.8.8 Association Drawings ___________________________________________________________________
3.3.2.9 Editing Drawings _____________________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.2.10 Editor Exit __________________________________________________________________________________________
   

3.3.3 Description and Regulation of the Electronic Part ____________________________________

 

3.3.3.1 Stabilized Power Supply with Backup Battery ___________________

   
3.3.3.2 CPU board ____________________________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.3.3 INTERFACE card ____________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.3.4 CONSOLLE card ____________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.3.5 SELECTION card IPB-48 ____________________________________________________________________
   
    3.3.3.6 P / P Motors Module __________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.3.7 SPI 16/13 module _________________________________________________________________________________________
   
3.3.3.8 Drive for Brush-Less Motor __________________________________________
   

3.3.4 Electronic Devices Accessories _____________________________________________________________

 

3.3.4.1 Video Terminal Configuration “FACIT 990” _________________________________

   
3.3.4.2 Serial Port Configuration “UFD” (Floppy Disk Unit) _______
   
3.3.4.3 TFD Software Application (Video Terminal Emulation and
   

4. EMPLOYMENT __________ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4.1 ASSEMBLING YARN CONES IN CONE HOLDERS _____________________________
 4.2 THREAD GUIDE THREADING _____________________________________________________________________________________
4.3 INITIAL OPERATION OF THE MACCHINA _______________________________________
4.4 SHOOTING _ _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4.5 START TO PRODUCTION __________________________________________________________________________________________
4.6 MACHINE INITIAL OPERATION CONDITIONS ___________
4.7 BREAKAGE AND DEPLETION OF POWER WIRE _________________
4.8 USING THE CYLINDER ADVANCING HANDLE _____________
i-3

Page
       

5. ORDINARY SUPPORT _______________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-1

 
5.1 DRAIN SUCTION FILTER PIECES YARN ______________________________ ____________ ______ 5-1
 
5.2 DRAIN PRESSURE REGULATOR FILTER ___________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-2
 
5.3 MANUAL LUBRICATION __________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-2

5.3.1 Oil Replacement in Transmission Case ____________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-5

   
5.3.2 Adding Oil to the Lubricator ______________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-6
   

 
5.4 LUBRICATOR CLEANING ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-7
5.4.1 Cleaning Main Filter and Magnetic Lubricator Cartridge _____________ ____________ ______ 5-7
   
5.4.2 Cleaning Internal Organs to the Lubricator __________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 5-7
   

6. EXTRAORDINARY SUPPORT _______________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-1

 
6.1 FASADURA ENCODER __________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-1
 
6.2 REGISTRATION OF SELECTION DEVICES ___________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-3

6.2.1 Registration Alignment Selection Cams with Heels Jacks Cylinder __ ______ 6-3
   
6.2.2 Cylinder Selection Cams Distance Registration ________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-4
   

 
6.3 REGISTRATION OF MESH TRAINING GROUPS _____________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-5

6.3.1 Passage Registration between Mesh Formation Trucks and

 
Relative Contracamones _______________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-5
6.3.2 Registration Height Camón Formation Mesh ______________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-6

6.4
MESH REDUCTION REGISTRATION ________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-7
6.5
REGISTRATION OF MESH TRAINING GROUPS DISTANCE
   
AND BOLTS CYLINDER NEEDLES ________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-10
6.6 THREAD GUIDE GROUP REGISTRATION _____________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-12
6.7 AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF STOP CONTROL NEEDLES AND THREAD 6-14
6.8 NEEDLE OPENING REGISTRATION _____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-16
6.8.1 Pneumatic Needle Opener Registration ____________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-16
 
  6.8.2 Registration Mechanical Needle Opener (Only for Machines  

    Thickness needles 0.7 mm and 0.6 mm) _______________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-18

6.9 PLATINAS RING GROUP REGISTRATION ______________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-20

6.9.1 Platen Ring Bearing Set Registration _____________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-20
 
  6.9.2 Registration Angular Position Ring Plates _________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-21

6.10 CENTERING AND FASADURA TRANSFER PLATE ARM ___ ____________ ______ 6-23
6.11 TRANSFER PLATE GROUP REGISTRATION ___________________________ ____________ ______ 6-25
6.12 REPLACEMENT OF THE BEARINGS GROUP IN THE CYLINDER HOLDER ___________ ____________ ______ 6-27
6.13 CYLINDER JACKS EXTRACTION ____________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-28
6.14 NEEDLE EXTRACTION ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-29
6.15 PLATINUM ESTRACTION ________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________ ______ 6-30
 i-4

Page

7. SELF-DIAGNOSIS ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 7-1

____________ ______

7-1
7.1 SELF-DIAGNOSIS WHEN STARTING THE MACHINE ____________________________________ ____________
______

7-1
7.1.1 Controls Relating to Flash Memories and Card Configuration ______ 7-3
7.1.2 Active Diagnostics at Power Up or During the General Test (Function 146) __________ ______
7-4
7.2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS DURING THE OPERATING CYCLE ________________________ ____________ ______ 7-15
7.3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS ____ ____________ ______

i-5
0. IMPORTANT RECOMMENDATIONS

ATTENTION! : Read carefully all the prescriptions contained in this chapter.

0.1 CONSULTATION OF THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL

MATEC recommends the user to carefully consult the entire content of this instruction manual and to scrupulously
respect all the rules written in it, in order to always obtain the necessary safety for all personnel in charge of the
machine and its correct operation. machine.

0.2 GENERAL RULES FOR THE SAFETY OF THE OPERATOR IN CHARGE

Beyond the elementary precautions, capable of constantly guaranteeing one's own safety, all personnel in charge of
the machine must always observe everything that follows.

- The personnel in charge of operating the machine must always be adequately trained, for the normal development
of their own specific duties.

- In order not to get entangled between moving parts:

. do not use excessively wide clothing, with very wide or very long sleeves, with blunt cuffs, collars, ties, scarves or
kerchiefs;

. never use rings, bracelets, pulses, necklaces and diges, in general;

. never have very long hair or, in any case, always avoid leaving it loose, with tails and / or braids.

- Never use light shoes, but do use shoes with a very solid upper part and possibly reinforced, in order to always
have the feet sufficiently protected from accidental falls by objects of any kind; In addition, it is appropriate that
such shoes are provided with a non-slip sole in good condition, in order to prevent possible falls caused by oil and /
or fat deposits on the floor.

- Never operate the machine in a state of imperfect efficiency of the person himself, caused by the consumption or
abuse of alcoholic, exciting, soothing, medicinal substances or other substances that may cause loss of balance
and / or drowsiness.

- Never throw away pieces of cigarettes, cigars, matches, etc., first you must take into account that they are well
extinguished, in order to avoid causing fires.
- Never have injuries, even minor ones, from contact with parts of the machine, dirty rags and objects used in it.
Also for the eyes it is essential to pay constant attention and take particular care.

- Never carry out operations outside your own professional skills, relative to the machine and everything connected
to it, in order not to compromise your own safety or that of others.
- Personnel not qualified in electrical repairs should never tamper with or attempt to repair electrical devices related
to the machine and everything that is connected to it.
Whoever it is, for any type of intervention on the machine, should always be careful never to expose conductors,
switches, electrical panels, electronic boards and other parts under electrical voltage, in order to avoid accidental
contact of any person with all that.
In each case, it is always mandatory to remove the power supply, disconnecting the plug from the power cable,
before carrying out interventions on electrical parts of the machine, in order not to unnecessarily expose yourself
to dangers of an electrical nature.
The personnel in charge of carrying out electrical repairs to the machine and everything connected to it must
always use suitable instruments, appropriately isolated, in order not to unnecessarily expose themselves to
dangers of an electrical nature.
- Never do any kind of actions on the machine and everything connected to it with wet hands or, in any case, not
completely dry, in order to avoid dangers caused by accidental contacts, also indirect, with electrical parts.
- Never use, in case of fire, hydrants, foam or powder extinguishers, but use fire extinguishers
carbon dioxide (CO 2 ); After using such fire extinguishers, it is always essential to let air enter the premises, in
order to promote the rapid release of all toxic gases present in the air.

0-1

- Never try to stop or slow the motorcycle from moving parts with your hands, with other parts of the body, with
tools or objects of any kind.

- Never carry out maintenance, registration, repair, or any other kind of operations, with the machine in operation: in
particular, always avoid manually lubricating or greasing moving parts and accessing to operate on parts under
electrical tension.
- Never improperly use tools, work instruments, etc., related to the machine; Before using such objects, it is always
essential to verify their good condition and correct efficiency.

- Never forget to remove tools, work instruments, etc. of the machine after use, in order to prevent such objects
from entering between moving parts, with a consequent danger to people, beyond causing damage to the machine
itself.

- Never remove protections and / or safety devices from the machine, only in absolute necessity of work: In this
case, it is essential to preventively disconnect the plug from the machine's power cable, therefore, after it has been
carried out. the repair or other operation, before reconnecting the same power cable, it is mandatory to reassemble
correctly and put the protections and / or safety devices previously removed into operation.
- In the course of any operation on the machine, it is always necessary to pay constant attention not to steal, with
the hands or with other parts of the body, the angular parts of the machine itself, in order not to cause injuries and
/ or bruises: in particular, if you need to operate in proximity to the needles, with the transfer plate raised it is
absolutely essential to avoid incurring any distraction, even momentary, in order not to steal the sawed edge of the
thread trimmer disc .
Also in eventual cases of cylinder rotation, with the transfer plate raised, it is absolutely essential to avoid incurring
any distraction, also momentary, in order not to use the cylinder itself, the needles and the other textile accessories
in motion .

- Never carry out, on the machine, operations on the needles and other textile accessories directly with your hands
in contact with them, without the aid of a suitable tweezers (also mentioned in paragraphs 6.13, 6.14 and 6.15), in
order to not to seek injuries.

- In the cases of movements and / or lifting of the machine, whether in the installation phase or in successive
eventualities, whoever it is must avoid being in proximity with the same machine, during the entire course of
operations, in order to not to compromise one's personal safety, as prescribed in paragraph 2.4.

- Never forget to use the appropriate individual protections, for the safety of the personnel (masks, caps, etc.),
eventually prescribed by the Management of the workplace itself, in full accordance with the relative laws in force
in the Nation for use the machine.

0-2

0.3 GENERAL RULES FOR USING THE MACHINE

The user must always observe everything that follows.

- Relative to the machine installation environment, it is necessary:

. respect the environmental conditions, prescribed in paragraph 1.1;

. avoid the presence of scratching dust and drafts;

. never install the machine in the vicinity of heat and / or humidity emanations in places exposed, also indirectly, to
rain and / or water infiltration;
 . guarantee, on each side of the machine, a sufficient useful space for relative access, in order to allow the
personnel in charge to operate easily on the same machine;

. guarantee a sufficient level of lighting: in particular, in areas where normal threading operations are carried out
(cone holder, thread guide, etc.) and replacement of water and textile accessories in general, ensure a level of
lighting of approximately 300 lux;
. carefully measure the concentrations of dust and dispersed cloudy oil, in the weaving room, of all the machines
under normal conditions of use and, eventually, provide to prescribe the operating personnel the use of
adequate individual protections, in full agreement with the relative norms of law in force in the Nation to use the
machine;
. carefully measure the level of noise present in the tissue room, with all the machines operating under normal
conditions of use and, eventually, provide the operating personnel with adequate warnings or the use of
adequate individual protections, in full accordance with the relative norms of law in force in the Nation to use
the machine, as described in paragraph 1.1.
- Never try to use the machine for jobs that do not conform to its own technical and production characteristics,
prescribed in chapter 1.
- MATEC does not guarantee the correct operation of the machine if it is not supplied with air that has been
dehumidified and filtered.
In addition, the compressor must be located in an environment where the air it draws in is free from exhalations of
gasoline, alcohol, or other chemical substances that could cause damage to the gaskets of the components of the
pneumatic installation of the machine.

- Before installation, check the power supply voltage and frequency values, indicated on the appropriate card
applied to the main switch of the machine, in the electrical cabinet, which must correspond to those of the local
network.

- Before installation, make sure that the power line of each machine is protected by a magneto-thermal safety
switch : If not, provide to satisfy such need.
- During the installation phase, any alternative discharge devices to the MATEC supply devices can be mounted on
the machine only if they are provided with relative fixing brackets that are completely electrically isolated, in order
to prevent electrostatic discharges from being sent to earth by part of the the mesh in the expulsion phase: in
cases of doubt, it is essential to contact the technical assistance service exclusively
MATEC.

- During the installation phase, connect the cone holder electrically to earth, in the correct way, as described in
paragraph 2.6, in order to avoid consequent electrical disturbances to the machine itself (caused by electrostatic
discharges).
- During installation, electrically ground the machine, in the correct way, as described in paragraph 2.12, in order to
avoid consequent electrical disturbances to the machine.

- To connect and disconnect the power cord of the machine from the mains socket always hold it by the plug,
inserting and pulling the plug always with great care: never pull the power cord.

- Never obstruct the spaces and the ventilation grills of the machine.

- Never introduce foreign objects of any kind into the electrical cabinet of the machine, especially if the latter is in
operation.

0-3

- Never carry out modifications or attachments to electrical devices related to the machine (motors, electrovalves,
electromagnets, etc.) and to everything that is connected to it for its command (relays, contactors, etc.) without
providing adequate protection , suitable to avoid consequent electrical disturbances to the same machine.
For example, in the cases in which the electronic reserve outputs are used in the machine to control eventual
electrical adjunct devices (in particular, solenoid valves and electromagnetics) having identical characteristics to
others, present in the same machine, and controlled with similar modalities, there are no contradictions. If such
devices, on the contrary, have different characteristics , their eventual use, in case of excessive current absorption,
may damage the electronic circuits of the machine or cause malfunctions to other devices.
In the cases of possible electrical adjunct devices, not controlled directly by the electronic part of the machine, a
typical use is represented by relays or contactors controlled by probably equipped with a higher power (in
particular, large electromagnets, large electrovalves, etc. electric motors of any type, etc.,): in all these
eventualities, it is mandatory to reserve electronic outputs of the same machine but which, in turn, other devices
command the introduction of adequate protections, suitable to avoid the generation of disturbances towards the
electronic part of the machine; Typical protection cases to adopt are as follows:
 . diode connected in antiparallelo to the coil of the eventual electrical adjunct devices, only if they are powered by
direct current (DC);

. transient surgeons (MOV) connected in parallel to the coil or to the winding of any additional electrical devices, in
particular, if these are powered by alternating current (AC);

. RC filters connected in parallel to the contacts of any relays, contactors, etc., which control motors or other
inductive loads.

When the type of protection to adopt and the relative dimensioning, using a possible electrical accessory device, is
doubtful, it is essential to contact the technical assistance service exclusively.
MATEC.

- ATTENTION! : POSSIBLE FIRE HAZARD → As written on the appropriate card applied to the main switch
of the machine, in the electrical cabinet, periodically, it is essential to clean the machine carefully, for the following
reasons:

. Our experience and the tests carried out have shown that mixing oil with pieces of yarn creates a mixture that can
be highly flammable.

. Flammability is a hazard.

. The proximity of this flammable mixture with electrical parts increases the danger.

. A short circuit and an electric shock can happen, despite all the ingenuities of the MATEC project: the possibility
of these events, in the machine, inevitably increases over time as a consequence of a natural degradation of the
insulation and safety.

To avoid fire hazards on the machine, it is essential to observe the following rules:

. Periodically check that the machine is nice, externally and internally, including the electrical cabinet.

. In particular, check that the machine, in correspondence with specific electrical parts (fuses, conductors, contacts
in general, fixed, transformer and other machinery), are always far from flammable substances.

. Guarantee the absence of flammable substances, in the machine, in all internal and external parts of the machine,
including the electrical cabinet.

. Always avoid starting the machine, if it is not clean and tidy, in particular if there are oil leaks mixed with pieces of
yarn: if this happens, stop the machine immediately, disconnect the plug from the power cable and remove
promptly and properly all the mixture formed of these components, before reconnecting and restarting the
machine.

0-4

- With the exception of specific products, for the lubrication of the machine, prescribed and used in specific areas,
based on the modalities provided in chapter 5, always avoid spraying the same machine with liquids of any kind: in
case of spraying accidentally, immediately disconnect the power plug and carefully dry all wet parts, before
reconnecting and operating the same machine again.

- Check frequently that, during the operation of the machine, any pieces of thread do not twist into moving parts,
thus preventing their correct operation.

- With the purpose of safety, the machine is equipped with appropriate protection devices (carters, protections,
electronic stops, etc.): therefore, always avoid operating the same machine without any of the aforementioned
protection devices , or with the latter altered.

- Use only raw materials (yarns, lubricants, etc.) in accordance with those prescribed, respectively, in paragraphs 1.1
and 5.3.

- More or less prolonged periods of inactivity of the machine, they can cause a progressive deterioration in it, if the
suitable protective measures are not adopted, prescribed in paragraph 2.8.

- In the event of replacement of machine parts, use only original MATEC spare parts.

- MATEC is not liable for possible damages resulting from modifications made by the user to the machine, without
the preventive authorization of the technical assistance service itself.
- The elimination of all used materials from the machine (packaging, yarn pieces, etc.) must always be in complete
accordance with the relative norms of law in force in the Nation to use the same machine.

- The elimination of all used lubricants from the machine (oils and greases, prescribed in paragraph 5.3) being
pollutants , must always be in complete agreement with the relative norms of law in force in the Nation to use the
same machine.

- The waste from the machine (when it needs to be replaced or, in any case, eliminated) should be eliminating, in
advance, all the lubricants used in it, in accordance with everything that is said in the previous point, therefore, the
waste They must be eliminated by relying exclusively on a qualified Company or Entity for the elimination of these
materials (iron, plastics, etc.): all this must be in complete accordance with the relative norms of law in force in the
Nation to use the machine.

- MATEC is not responsible for eventual damages, of any kind, caused by a wrong interpretation of the particular
catalog of spare parts, the instruction manual, the operator's manual, each other manual and each other document
related to the machine.

0-5

1. TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

WARNING: The machine complies with the "Machinery Directive" CEE 89/392, in terms of machinery safety, therefore,
it is provided with the "CE" seal and, in relation to the aforementioned directive, it is provided, only ,
or for each number of machines, a copy of the "Declaration of Conformity", destined for all CEE
Nations and other Nations, in which such a document is requested.

1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

"MONO 4", illustrated in figure 1.0, is a 4-feed mono cylinder machine, with integral electronic control, for the
production of classic and sports socks, and is predisposed to:

- single or double edge;

- ribbed imitation leg;
- 3-color stripes;
- floating drawing, unlimited in all areas, with the following possibilities:

. to a feeding, with three colors per pass plus the bottom without elastic, or with two colors for each pass plus the
bottom with elastic;
. at two feeds, with a color for each pass plus the bottom without elastic.

- heel and toe in alternating motion;

- smooth mesh;
- total or partial sponge at four feedings;
- "standard" sponge mesh, or "double plating";
- Traditional or optional "ROSSO" overlock, with preparation of the sock according to the new "ROSSO" procedure.

Figure 1.0

1-1

1.1 GENERAL DATA

- Cylinder diameter : 4 "- 3" ¾ - 3 "½

- Needles (11.7 mm barb):. On a 4 "cylinder diameter machine:

n. 64-76-88-96-108 with thickness 1mm;

n. 64-76-88-96-108-112-116-120 with thickness 0.85mm; n. 132 -
140 - 144 - 160 - 168 - 176 with thickness 0.7 mm.

. In machine with cylinder diameter 3 "¾:

n. 64-76-84-88-96-108-120 with thickness 0.85mm; n.

132-140-144-160-168 with thickness 0.7 mm;
n. 176 - 200 with thickness 0.6 mm.

. In machine with cylinder diameter 3 "½:

n. 64-72-76-84-88-96-108-112 with thickness 0.85mm; n. 108-

120-124-132-140-144 with thickness 0.7 mm;
n. 160 - 168 - 176 - 200 with thickness 0.6 mm.

- Feeding : n. 4 spinning; n. 2 elastic feeds.

- Thread guide : n. 24, on electropneumatic command, subdivided into n.6 for each
    feeding.

- Selection devices : n. 5 by electronic command, with 4, 6 or 8 levels of needle-needle selections

for drawings and fixed selections, of which n. 1 device with sense cams
   
    reverse, for the execution of the heel and toe.

- Maximum speeds of :. 320 rpm on smooth mesh and sponge;

cylinder rotation . 220 rpm in the zone changes, in imitation ribbed in the drawing;
 
 . 200 pendolations / minute, on the heel and toe (in alternate motion).

WARNING: Particular yarns or types of mesh may request a reduction in the aforementioned values of the maximum
cylinder rotation speeds.

- Environmental conditions : . Temperature = 10 to 45 ° C;

. RH = from 50% to 90%;
. Altitude = 0 to 3000 m above sea level.

- Feeding conditions:. Line voltage = 200/220/380/420/460/500 V ± 10%

. Network frequency = 50/60 Hz; only 50 Hz for line voltage 380V
. Compressed air supply pressure = 5.5 ± 0.5 bar

ATTENTION !: The compressed air supply pressure must never drop below 5 bar,
also in the moments of maximum absorption by the machine.

1-2

- Usable yarns :
 1-3

- Average time, indicative, of production of n.

1 sock, size 12, type "Tennis" (with
heel and toe), drawn on leg : ≅ 80 seconds (equivalent to ≅ 45 dozen in 24 hours)

- Compressed air consumption, at 6

bar, in sock size 12 : ≅ Normal / 15 liters per minute

- Electrical powers requested at 380 V / 50 Hz : . Without electric vacuum:

 
Active power max order KW 0.85
 
Apparent power max order KVA 0.95
 
Average requested active power KW 0.65

. With electric vacuum cleaner:

   
Sock pull (values referred to the connection  
Active power max order KW 1.75
point between the bypass valve and the filter  
Apparent power max order KVA2.15
in leg phase; see paragraph 2.11)  
Average requested active power KW 1.55

 
Depression ≅ mbar 48 (50 Hz)
   
≅ mbar 65 (60 Hz)
. Capacity ≅ m3/h 150 (50 Hz)
   
≅ m3/h 180 (60 Hz)

- Machine net weight (without packaging) : ≅ Kg 340 (comprising: Kg 25, relating to any electric
vacuum cleaner, Kg 60, relating to any cone holder and Kg
5, relating to spare parts)

- Gross machine weight (with packaging) : ≅ Kg 430

- Packaging volumes : mm 970x980x1870

- Machine volumes without cone

holder (references to figure 1.1) : A - Maximum width ≅ mm 945
 
B - Maximum depth "standard" ≅ mm 815
C -Maximum depth with
   

 
electric vacuum ≅ mm 945
  D -Maximum height with plate  

 
transfer down ≅ mm 1590
  E - Maximum height with plate  

 
raised transfer ≅ mm 1720

- Machine volumes with cone holder

(references to figure 1.1) : F - Maximum width ≅ mm 1290
 
G- Maximum depth "standard" ≅ mm 1915
  H -Maximum depth with  

 
adjunctive cones ≅ mm 2230
J - Maximum height ≅ mm 2430

1-4
 Figure 1.1

- Issuance of rumor :

The machine emits, in its operation, a quantity of noise that can be assessed by the data indicated in the
"CERTIFICATION CHART", reported below: such data refer to the sound emission of a machine in a special room
(semi-anechoic) , equipped with suitable non-reflective walls.

"CERTIFICATION TABLE" OF THE MACHINE'S RUMOR ISSUE

The machine has been subjected to a buzz test according to ISO 9902 and ISO 3744.
The test, which refers to a machine cycle with speed min = 220 rpm and max = 300 rpm, has shown the
following acoustic data:

- Average surface sound pressure level:

heavy A L p A ≅ 80 dB
NOTE: The values indicated above have been measured in a special room (semi-anechoic), characterized by
an environmental coefficient K 2 = 2 dB on a 16.9 m 2 measuring surface .

ATTENTION! : It is possible that the sound level of the fabric room, with non-reflective walls, ceiling and floor and
with other machines in operation, exceed the values indicated by the official regulations, therefore,
it is an obligation to use the individual sound protections: Relatively to this, MATEC recommends
that the user, after having installed the machine, take care of and measure the effective sound
level of the installation and adopt the legal measures (for Italy see Decree Law No. 277 of 08/25 /
1991, which welcomes the EEC regulations on purpose).

1-5

1.2 COMPOSITION OF THE MACHINE

The machine is made up of the following types of supplies:

- Standard (base machine)

The supplies are always present in the machine, illustrated in the different figures of the Particular Spare Parts
Catalog, they comprise the following devices.

. Microprocessor unit for controlling all machine commands and for programming articles, sizes and speeds
. Backup battery
. Brushless motor
. Yarn pieces suction filter (double)
. Partializing valve
. Lubrication on time
. Pressure regulating filter, with reducer and relative pressure gauge
. Sock expulsion bell, with stop

- Optional

Supplies are provided by request, illustrated in the different figures of the Particular Spare Parts Catalog, which are
listed below.

. Electric vacuum cleaner (voltage and frequency on specific request)

. UL-CSA cables (for machine without or with electric vacuum cleaner)
. Rear Stop Control
. lnterface Serial RS 422
. Material for Double Plated in Smooth Mesh (based on the diameter of the cylinder and the thickness of the needles)
. Material for Double Plating in Partial Sponge (based on the diameter of the cylinder and the thickness of the
needles)

. Low Device 1 ^ Feeding Mesh Forming Trucks for "ROSSO" Overlock with Sock Preparation according to the New
"ROSSO" Procedure
. "USA" type thread guide
. 24 Teeth Thread Cutter Disc (only for machines with 4 "cylinder diameter)
. Material for Machine that does not have MATEC Cone Holder
. Cone holder ("Standard Base" model, "Standard 96" model or a "n. 23 Cones" model)
. Indicator Bulb for "Standard" or "n. 23 Cones" Cone Holder
 . IRO wire feeders for Cone Holder a "n. 23 Cones"
. Feeder "1 elastic" (for machine with n. 2 elastic)
. Cabling for Feeder "1 elastic"
. Electronic wire stops (n.26 - BTSR or RMB MASSARDI)

- Kits for Machine Transformations

The supplies are provided as spare parts and / or separately from the machine, they are as follows.

. Material for Machine Transformation from "Standard" to "Double Plated" (for smooth mesh or for partial sponge,
based on the diameter of the cylinder and the thickness of the needles)
. "Standard" Sock Pull
. Sock Pull with "Antitwist"
. Sock Pull with "Turner"
. Plate Ring for Mesh with Drawing and Double Plated Sponge (only for machines with needles of thickness 0.85
mm and 1 mm)
. "Lycra" clamp for Thread Guide n. 1 of 1 ^ feed (only for machine with cylinder diameter 4 ")
. Independent BTSR Tensioner for Thread Guide
. Multiple Tensioner for Thread Guide

1-6

The machine also includes:

- Endowments

Every 50 machines (or less number): Machine Software (in Italian, English, French, German, Spanish), Series of
Gauges for Registrations and Fasaduras (mentioned in chapter 6), n. 2 Keys to Open / Lock Electric Cabinet,
Cylinder Advance Handle (mentioned in paragraph 4.8).

- Connectable Computer Systems

. IBM computer ("base" or "high performance" model)

. Graphic System Program (in Italian, English, French, German, Spanish)
. 24-Pin Printer for IBM Computer
. Black and White Scanner with Relative Adapter
. Machine printer
. Video Terminal
. Cart for Video or Computer Terminal
. Floppy Disk "UFD" complete with cable
. Floppy Disk for UFD (in Italian, English, French, German)
. Software "TFD", Video Terminal Emulation and UFD
. Cable for Computer-Machine Connection (length 5 m or 30 m)
. Cable for Machine-Machine Connection
. Power Group for IBM Computer (115 Vac or 230 Vac)

- Technical Provision Documentation

Each quantity of machines are provided with the following documents:

. Particular Parts Catalog

. Instruction manual
. Operator's Manual
. Mechanical Schemes
. Electrical Schematics and Electronic Card Layouts
 1-7

1.3 BASE ARTICLES

In figure 1.3 all the areas related to the sock are illustrated; For each zone, various types of mesh are described, by
means of which it is possible to obtain all the basic articles that the relative Floppy Disk contains.

B = EDGE:
. Simple
. Double
. Ribbed imitation 1: 1 or 3: 1
. Float drawing (*)

G = LEG:
. Smooth mesh
. Ribbed imitation 1: 1 or 3: 1
. Sponge (**)
. 3 color stripes
. Float drawing (*)

D = FOOT:
. Smooth mesh
. Partial or total sponge (in 4 feedings) (**)
. Float drawing (*)

R = BRIDGE:
.Traditional "ROSSO" seam
. "ROSSO" type seam with preparation of the sock
according to the new "ROSSO" procedure (Optional)

S = DISHENEBRATE:
. Smooth mesh

P = TIP:
T = HEEL:
. Smooth mesh (alternating movement to 1 feed)
. Sponge (alternating movement to 1 feed) (**)
. Heel (4 feeds in heel and 1 in neck foot)
. Tubolar (4 feeds)

(*) Possibility of floating drawing (unlimited in all

areas):
. 2 colors for each pass plus the bottom with
elastic (in 1 feed)
. in 3 colors for each pass plus the bottom without
elastic (in 1 feed)
. 1 color for each range plus the bottom without
elastic (in 2 feeds)

NOTE: By giving up the possibility of making the float

drawing, 2 elastic feeds are usable, for
higher productions.

(**) Possibility of sponge:

. Standard
. Double plating

Figure 1.3

1-8

1.4 BUILDABLE MESH LINKS

Figures 1.4.1 to 1.4.4 show the main constructable mesh links of the machine.
 Smooth mesh 1: 1 ribbed imitation mesh
Figure 1.4.1 Figure 1.4.2

3: 1 ribbed imitation mesh Sponge mesh

Figure 1.4.4
Figure 1.4.3  

1.5 EFFECTIVE SIZES

The effective sizes of the machine, based on the diameter of the cylinder and the number of needles present in the
same cylinder, are the following:

CHILD SIZES MEN'S SIZES

   

6 - 7 - 8 - 9 - 10 10½ - 11 - 11½ - 12
   

1.6 MODIFICATIONS
MATEC reserves the right to make the modifications it deems appropriate to the machine, at any time and without
notice.

1-9

2. INSTALLATION

WARNING : MATEC is not responsible for damage or inconvenience to the machine, caused by not correctly applying
the rules contained in this chapter.

2.1 MODALITY OF MACHINE ISSUANCE

The machine can be shipped to the destination in the following types of packaging:
- fixed on a wooden base and wrapped in a waterproof bag;
- fixed on a wooden base, wrapped in a waterproof bag and closed in a box.

The machine is fully assembled in each of its parts, leaving some groups (appropriately arranged inside the package),
described in paragraph 2.6.

2.2 STORAGE
Each machine still contained in its own packaging, must be stored scrupulously respecting all the indications reported
in the same packaging, in order to avoid consequent falls:

- ATTENTION: the weight of the packaging content is unbalanced;

- Never tilt or lift the package by means of cables, in order to avoid damage and a consequent fall;
- never place the package lying on its own side;
- never turn the packaging (with the base itself facing up).

In addition, it is essential to bear in mind that:

- Each package should never be under or superimposed on another package;

- the contents of the packaging are fragile and must therefore always be handled with care;
- the contents of the package should not be in humid places and, therefore, it should always be put in a suitable dry
place.

2.3 UNPACKING
Referring to figure 2.3, the unpacking of the machine must be
carried out as follows:

a) Remove the two opposite walls (1) and (2) of the box
where the destination addresses are reported.

b) Remove the two remaining walls and the cover (3).

c) Remove the waterproof protective bag from the

machine.

d) Remove the anchoring brackets for lowering the

machine, placed on the base of the box (4).

NOTE: In the event that the packaging consists only of the

base with the waterproof bag, it is necessary to refer
only to points “c”) and “d)” of this paragraph.

Figure 2.3

2-1

2.4 POSITIONING THE FLOOR

Referring to figure 2.4, the machine, in order to be able to position itself on the ground, must be raised and moved,
using exclusively the points in the zone (A), anterior, and (B), posterior, in the upper part of the descent. By introducing
two steel bars (2) and (3) on the external sides, outside the machine volume, into the tubes (for their entire length), it
is possible to:

- the dam with a lift truck (1), or

- the hook with a system of argana.

ATTENTION! : To move or lift the machine, also after installation, it is essential:

- Preventively verify the load capacity and the sustaining efficiency of the lift truck, or of
another suitable system used and also, during the entire course of operations, whoever it is
must avoid being in the vicinity of the suspended load or in the phase of movement, in order
not to compromise one's personal safety;

- Absolutely avoid using the transfer plate transmission arm, in order not to damage the
machine.
To position the machine on the ground, carry out the following operations:

a) Raise the machine from the base of the box, by means of the elevator car (1) or the argan system, previously
mentioned.

b) Assemble the four legs with the respective fixing nuts, under the base of the machine.

c) Finally, lower the machine to the ground with great caution.

Figure 2.4

2-2

2.5 LEVELING
The machine, before leveling, should be positioned at a desired point on the floor, and the structure should be of a
solid nature.
Referring to figure 2.5, to level the machine, carry out the following operations in order:

a) Put a bubble level on the “worked” surface

(that is, where there is no presence of paint) of
the base plate of the machine, rotating the
same bubble level slowly, in order to be able to
identify possible points of unevenness from the
same machine.

b) If necessary, loosen the brake nuts

(1) of the four adjustable feet (2), previously
mounted under the base of the machine, with
the help of the key (3) (code 070-8024-00-9),
provided on request.
c) Move the four adjustable feet (2), with the help
of the wrench (3), until determining the level of
the controllable machine, again, by means of
the bubble level, on the worked surfaces of the
same plate

d) After having verified the correct leveling of the

machine, loosen the lock nuts (1) under the
base of the machine.
Figure 2.5
WARNING : It is a good rule to check the leveling of the machine again after approximately one month of work, from
its installation.

2.6 ASSEMBLY OF SEPARATE GROUPS

After having leveled the machine, it is necessary to
mount the following separate groups on it:

- Tube sock draw

- Sock expulsion bell
- Maintenance ring for socks bag
- Strainer suction yarn pieces
- Electronic thread stops
- Eventual cone holder

NOTE: To make the correct mounting in the

  machine, of the separate groups, is
  necessary to consult the "CATALOGUE
  PARTICULAR OF SPARE PARTS "at
respective figures.
   
Figure 2.6

WARNING : - After having mounted the electronic wire stops on the machine, it is also essential to make the relative
ground "ground" connection to the common point (P), in figure 2.6, inside the electrical
cabinet.

- In the event that it is necessary to mount the cone holder or, if anything, another cone
holder is available, it is essential to make the relative connection of "ground" to the common
point of "ground", by means of a suitable electrical cable (as a rule , yellow-green color): the
connection must be made within any area of the cone holder, provided that it is not painted
or not superficially protected, and the common point of “ground” (P), from figure 2.6, inside
the electrical cabinet, or by taking a "ground" cable, coming from another socket, to the
contact point of the same cone holder.

2-3

2.7 GENERAL CONTROLS

Check that, during transport and when unpacking the machine, groups of fixing elements have not become loose or
dispersed and that the external parts of the machine itself are not damaged.

2.8 REMOVING THE ANTIOXIDE MIXTURE

After having carried out the general checks on the machine, it is necessary to proceed to remove the anti-rust mixture,
present in some areas of the same machine, as follows:
a) Remove the transfer plate, washing it with oil and removing by means of a brush, all the antioxide mixture
present in it, then lubricate the same transfer plate with oil, of the type prescribed in the "MANUAL
LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS CHART "in paragraph 5.3.
b) Remove all the mixture present in the needles and on the plates, by means of a brush abundantly wet with oil,
of the type prescribed in the "MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS TABLE" in paragraph 5.3, then blow on
the area mentioned above by medium of a compressed air gun.

WARNING : If, in successive times, the machine is left inactive for long periods, it is essential to treat it as follows:
- Free the needles from each residue of mesh fabric.

- Remove any yarn residue from the suction nozzle (on the transfer plate).

- Position the needles and the transfer jacks so that they are completely inside the seats.
- Clean well the different parts of the machine that are smeared, of needle residues, other textile
accessories, etc.
- Spray abundantly cloudy oil, of the type "AGIP RUSTIA 81A", on all parts of the machine, so that
they are evenly wet, except those that contain electronic parts; the brown parts are exposed to
rust easily if they are not protected, therefore they should be sprayed with oil, while those that
are painted or protected with zinc do not need such operation; This is also valid for the external
parts of the machine, for example for the cone holder, always for only metallic parts not
painted or not protected with zinc.
 - Spread, by means of a brush, a thin layer of mixture, appropriately homogenized, consisting of
3/4 of "AGIP GR. PV2" grease and 1/4 of "AGIP RUSTIA 81A" oil, in the following areas:
. needles and sinkers;
. steel parts in contact with the yarn;
. transfer plate;
. transfer jacks;
. hacksaw.

2-4

2.9 FILLING THE LUBRICATOR AND CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL IN THE TRANSMISSION
CASE
Fill the lubricator (placed at the back of the machine and illustrated in figure 5.3.2) as described in paragraph 5.3.2,
with an oil according to the characteristics indicated in the "MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTION CHART" of
paragraph 5.3.

Referring to figure 2.9, check the correct oil level inside the transmission box (1), by means of the level indicator (2):
the oil level should approximately coincide with the horizontal reference line, printed at the same level indicator.
For eventual aggregations, carry out the following operations:

a) Unscrew the upper cover (3), on the base plate (4).

b) Fill the hole (5) with the missing oil, of the same type as that contained in the lubricator (prescribed in the
"MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS TABLE" in paragraph 5.3), progressively controlling the aggregations
by means of the level indicator ( two).

c) Screw the upper cover (3) back into the hole (5).
 Figure 2.9

2-5

2.10 CONNECTION TO A CENTRALIZED COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

Before connecting the machine to the centralized compressed air installation, it is essential to bear in mind all the
following:
- When the compressed air leaves the compressor, it is advisable to install a drying device, in order to prevent a
possible formation of condensed water; For this purpose, we indicate the following two drying installation
builders, capable of supplying the models to be adopted, in relation to the number of connecting machines:

. MTA
. ATLAS COPCO

WARNING : The cost incidence of the drying installation, for each machine, is significantly lower in relation to a
greater number of connecting machines (with the relative type of drying, prescribed by the
installation builder).

- The pressure regulating filter (1), illustrated in figure 2.10, must be discharged every time the condensed water
reaches the maximum level. The condensate separator, inside the filter, is of the semi-automatic type, therefore,
when the line pressure is canceled, the condensate is automatically discharged. However, there is the possibility
of downloading manually, as described in paragraph 5.2. To conveniently obtain the semi-automatic discharge,
for each line of machines it is advisable to install a general three-way valve so that, at the end of each week,
when the compressed air supply to the centralized installation is removed, the relative pipes they must be
completely discharged of compressed air (without discharging the compressor); Such operation will allow the
condensate separator, inside the pressure regulating filter (1), to automatically discharge the condensate
present, thus avoiding manual intervention on each machine.

WARNING : The internal diameter of the pipes of the centralized installation must have a suitable dimension,
suitable to contain, as much as possible, pressure drop.

Referring to figure 2.10, the connection of the machine to the centralized installation of compressed air must be
carried out as follows:

a) The diameter (D) of the tube (2), in rubber, of

the centralized installation, must be 10 - 11
mm.

b) Connect the tube (2) to the bottom of the

connection (3), of the pressure regulator filter
(1), located at the rear of the machine.

c) Close the tube (2) at the link (3) with a metal

closing clamp (4).
d) The value of the compressed air supply
pressure must be that prescribed in paragraph
1.1.
e) The pressure regulator filter (1) must be
positioned at the value of 6 bar, moving the
knob (5).

ATTENTION! : The pressure sensor (6) is calibrated

at a pressure value of 4.6 ± 0.3
bar and, such value must not be
changed absolutely; therefore the
screw (7) is sealed.

Figure 2.10
c) The reducer (8) must be positioned at the
pressure value of 4 ± 0.2 bar, moving the knob
(9).

2-6
2.11 CONNECTION TO CENTRALIZED SUCTION INSTALLATION
NOTE: The connection of the machine to the centralized suction
installation must be carried out only if
the machine is not equipped with the electric vacuum
cleaner.

Referring to figure 2.11, to connect the machine to the

centralized suction installation, operate as follows:
a) Check that, in correspondence of the link (1), between
the yarn pieces suction filter and the partializer valve (2),
a vacuum value equal to that indicated in paragraph 1.1,
based on the mains frequency.

b) Carry out the aforementioned measurement with the A - To the upper part of the yarn pieces suction
help of a vacuum gauge. filter, connected to the centralized suction
system
B - To the expulsion of the sock
Figure 2.11

2.12 CONNECTION TO THE POWER LINE

In order to guarantee correct electrical operation of the machine,
before connecting it to the electrical line, it is necessary to carry out
the following checks in order:

a) Verify that the effective value of the input line voltage is

contained in a field equal to the nominal value ± 10%.
Figure 2.12a
b) Connections to the motor blades of the eventual
electro-aspirator should result: Figure 2.12a

- of the "triangle" type in the event that the line voltage is equal
to or less than 220 Vac, as illustrated in figure 2.12a;

- of the "star" type in the case that the line voltage is equal to or
greater than 380 Vac, as illustrated in figure 2.12b.
The connecting sheets (1) and (2), illustrated in Figures 2.12a and
2.12b, are intended for connecting the thermal capsules.
Figure 2.12b

ATTENTION! : Before carrying out any operation (checks, disassembly, etc.) on the machine's motor, on the electric
vacuum cleaner and on the relative connection plates, always make sure that the power cable is
disconnected.

c) The connection to the transformer, inside the lowering, must result in the correct value of the line voltage.

ATTENTION! : Before carrying out any operation (checks, disassembly, etc.) on the transformer, inside the lowering,
always make sure that the power cable is disconnected.

2-7

d) The ground "ground" cable coming from the electric line (as a rule, yellow-green in color ) must have a
section of at least 2 mm² and must be connected to the common "ground" point (P), of figure 2.6, inside the
electrical cabinet, in order to protect the machine from possible electrical disturbances.
In the main electrical cabinet, from the machine installation environment, the connection between the "neutral"
electrical cable (central point of the three-phase line) and the "terra" electrical cable is carried out; Normally, the
"neutral" wire is not distributed in the electrical line, composed of 3 conductors plus the "ground" wire: There are
also some electrical lines in which the "neutral" wire is not connected to ground. In no case is it allowed that the
"ground" electrical cable , connected to the machine, be used at the same time for other machines or for other
electrical devices as an alternative to the "neutral" electrical cable , even if the two cables are connected to each
other. in the main electrical cabin.
NOTE: The electrical ground connection is also essential to protect some cables and circuits
electronic devices, in order to protect them from eventual electrical disturbances.
 

After having carried out the aforementioned checks and interventions, connect the plug of the machine's power cable
to the electrical line.

In the event that the machine is equipped with an electric vacuum cleaner, it is necessary to verify the correct rotation
sense of the motor of the same electric vacuum cleaner, in the following way:
a) Put the main switch (2), from figure 3.1, in position " 1 ".

b) Press, on the command panel, the ( FAN ON ) key, illustrated in figure 3.2.2, determining that the relative signal
lights up.
c) At this point if, as a rule, the suction of the machine is verified, press the ( FAN ON ) key again , determining
that the relative signal goes off, then report the general switch to position " 0 ", thus determining , the machine
is paid.
d) In the event that the suction of the machine is not verified, after having turned it off as described in point "c)",
remove the plug from the electrical line, therefore invert two wires in it, reconnecting it, to the line, then repeat
the operations relative to points "a)", "b)", "c)"; in this case, the suction of the machine must be efficient.

2.13 CONNECTION TO THE VIDEO TERMINAL OR TO THE COMPUTER

To transfer the data, from the video terminal or from the computer to the machine, connect such unit to connection
(5), of figure 3.1, by means of the designated cable.
For powering the video terminal, the computer or other electronic programming, monitoring, etc. system, it is
appropriate to connect to the electrical outlet (7), in figure 3.1, in order to obtain an optimal electrical ground
connection.

WARNING : If it is not possible to connect the video terminal, the computer or other monitoring programming system,
etc., to the electrical socket (7), in figure 3.1, it must be otherwise, ensuring the correct connection
between the power cable. "Ground" of the single-phase electrical line, feeding such electronic
systems, and the "ground" cable of the three-phase electrical line, feeding the machine; If in doubt,
it is essential to make the aforementioned connection, by means of a cable (as a rule, yellow-green
in color ) with a section of at least 2 mm².

To activate the different editor programming procedures, refer to paragraph 3.3.2.

2-8

3. OPERATIONAL COMMANDS AND PROGRAMMING

3.1 EXTERNAL PART ELECTRICAL CABINET

ATTENTION! : - It is essential that only qualified personnel be authorized to operate inside the electrical cabinet.
- In cases where it is necessary to rotate the electrical cabinet, to gain access to the internal part
of the lower part of the machine, unauthorized personnel, before carrying out such operation,
must always make sure that the general switch (2) of figure 3.1 is always on find it in position
"0".

Referring to figure 3.1, which illustrates the external part of the electrical cabinet, the following are indicated:
- The door (1).

- The main switch (2) ______________________________________________________ :. in position " 0 " it interrupts the electrical supply of the
machine;

. in position " 1 " connects the machine's electrical power

supply.

- The two locks (3) _________________________________________________________ With the main switch (2) in position " 0 ", they allow the
: door (1) to be opened , with the help of the key (4) (code
070-3132-00-9), supplied by supply.

- The key (4).

- The connection (5) _____________________________________________________________________ : to be used, by means of a RS 232 C serial line, to

the connection with the "Connectable Computer Systems",
described in paragraph 1.2.

- The electrical socket (6) (24 Vac - 48 VA max) ________________ : to be used for:

. the connection to the inspection bulb holder (code

190-0889-00-9), provided by request;

. power supply to the Floppy Disk UFD).

- The electrical socket (7) (220 V / 50 Hz) _____________________________ : to be used for the electrical supply of the terminal
video or computer, if placed near the machine.

WARNING : To prevent differences in ground potential from causing eventual decomposition to the machine, the
video terminal, or the computer, it is necessary:

- connect the video terminal, or the computer, exclusively to the electrical socket (7);
- connect and disconnect the cable from the serial line exclusively on the machine turned off.

- the command panel (8) __________________________________________________ : designed to control all the operating and programming
procedures of some particular functions of the machine, as
described successively in paragraphs 3.2, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3
and 3.2.4.

3-1
 Figure 3.1

3.2 CONTROL BOARD

The control panel, illustrated in figure 3.2, comprises:

- The buttons (1) (described and illustrated in paragraph

3.2.1);

- The operating keyboard (2) (described and illustrated

in paragraph 3.2.2)

Figure 3.2

- The programming keyboard (3) (described and illustrated in paragraph 3.2.3);

- The series of signals (4) (described and illustrated in paragraph 3.2.4).

3-2

3.2.1 Control Buttons

The control buttons, illustrated in figure 3.2.1,

comprise:

- The green button (START), which is intended:

. to the engine running of the eventual electric

vacuum cleaner;

. to the start of the engine of the machine, which

is verified automatically after a few moments
of the start of the engine of the electric
vacuum cleaner, if the latter is present in the
machine.

NOTE: - After pressing the green button (START), the

running speed is always gradual (by effect
of the machine motor) until reaching the
programmed value (of the speed) for the
momentary phase of the machine cycle
(see paragraph 3.3 ).

- If the machine is turned off, by means of

the general switch (on the electrical
cabinet door), when it is turned on again,
after having pressed the green button
(START), the machine cycle starts again
from the beginning.

Figure.3.2.1

- The red button (STOP), which is intended:

. to the interruption of the engine of the machine;

 . no to the interruption of the motor of the eventual electric vacuum cleaner.

- The black button (JOG), which is intended for the very slow advance of the cylinder, at a speed of 20 rpm; yes, the
present button, pressed and left, with the cylinder in motion, determines the interruption of the cylinder.

3-3

3.2.2 Operating Keyboard

The operating keyboard, illustrated in figure 3.2.2,

comprises the following keys (each provided with
the relative marking):

(a) "FAN ON", intended to command the machine

input in the operating phase
(This happens by accelerating the remote
control of the eventual electric vacuum
cleaner). If the first zone of the machine cycle
has not yet started, the article is processed in
execution.
If this key is pressed again, in any zone of the
machine cycle, with the machine in manual
command STOP, in this case the previous
condition returns (that is, the aforementioned
remote switch is de-energized).

(b) "SLOW", intended for the command to execute

the machine cycle at reduced speed. The
speed, reduced, to which the present key is
associated, is programmable by means of
keyboard procedure n. 430 (successively
described in paragraph 3.3), which determines
the percentage reduction with respect to the
programmed value.
Figure 3.2.2
 

NOTE: There are some procedures for automatic removal of the "SLOW" condition, after a
determined number of machine cycles, programmed through function 171 (see paragraph 3.3).
 

(c) "MINI CYCLE", intended to command the shortening of the machine cycle, in order to quickly report the
machine in position "0".
For each phase, the number of turns necessary to activate all the programmed commands of the different
electrovalves is calculated and carried out.
In the event that a smaller number of turns has been programmed than the one previously described, the
programmed number of turns will be made.
Furthermore, the execution of the drawings is inhibited until the next cycle.
NOTE: - It is not possible to clear the "MINI CYCLE" condition in alternate motion zones.

- The "MINI CYCLE" condition can also be entered automatically by lifting the thread guide gaps, if it has
been programmed using function 420 (see paragraph 3.3).

(d) "NO CYCLE", intended to command the machine to stay in the same phase, without going to the next one.
The spin count is, however, locked in correspondence of the penultimate turn of the current zone of the
machine cycle.

NOTE: The "NO CYCLE" is not accepted by the sock start zones and in the alternate movement zones.

3-4

(e) "STOP / ZERO", intended for the command to interrupt the machine in position "0", at the end of the current
cycle.

(f) "SINGLE STEP", intended to command the shortening of each zone of the cycle, determining the automatic
interruption of the machine, two cylinder turns before the end of the same zone.
To carry out the rest of the cycle, just press the green button (START). In
addition, the execution of the drawings is inhibited until the next cycle.

(g) "SOCK EJ.", intended to command the expulsion of the sock, opening the partializer valve; by releasing this key,
the valve returns to the previous position.

(h) ”T. PLATES UP ”, destined to the command of the complete“ lifting ”of the thread guide holes, thus exciting the
two pistons.

The "lift" operation automatically determines the following conditions:

. introduction of the "SLOW" condition;

. Disabling of the elastic clamps;

. output 2 or Movimento "Stop Heels Needles", if introduced;

. output of the "Stub Recovery" command, if it is entered;

. inhibition of the "Elastic Stop" sensor;

. inhibition of the "Stop Needles" sensor;

. lifting of the feeder, or of the feeders, of the elastic (exclusion);

. lifting of the thread guides;

. activation of the "MINI CYCLE" condition when the machine starts, if this condition is enabled.

The "lowering" operation automatically determines the following conditions:

. de-introduction of the "SLOW" condition is deactivated;

. eventual rehabilitation of the elastic forceps, such as programming;

. reintroducing 2 or movement "Stop Heels Needles", if programmed;

. lowering of the feeder, or of the feeders, of the elastic;

. rehabilitation of the sensors ”Stop Elastic” and ”Stop Lengueta Agujas”;

. Lowering of the thread guides, in the working position.

 NOTE: The operation of this key is only for the stopped machine.

(i) ”F1”, destined:

. pressing, first the present key, then "1", to the opening of the 1 or elastic clip ;

. pressing, first the present key, then "2", the opening of the caliper 2 or elastic;

. pressing, first the present key, then "3", to the contemporary activation of the 1 ^ and 2 ^ feed needle opener
blows;

. pressing, first the present key, then "4", to the opening of the clip "lycra 1";

. pressing, first the present key, then "5", to the opening of the clip "lycra 2";

. pressing, first the present key, then "6", to the opening of the clip "lycra 3".

3-5

NOTE: - Activation only achieves one of the above conditions at a time.

- The operation of this key is intended only for the stopped machine.

To deactivate each of the aforementioned conditions, just press the "F1" key.

(l) "F2", designed to turn off the machine, in the event of an intervention of the reserve battery.

(m) "F3", currently not used

(n) "RESET", destined to the command of the immediate stepping of the step- by -step motor to control
the plate ring, by pressing the key; and when it is left again, the aforementioned passo-passo motor
automatically reports in the position in which it was at the moment of pressing the key.

3.2.3 Programming Keypad

The programming keyboard, illustrated in figure 3.2.3, comprises:

- a series of keys (K), which use is described in paragraph 3.3, in the different keyboard programming functions;

- The display (D), for the visualization of all the messages of the machine.
The contrast of the display (D) is adjusted by moving the trimmer, located on the card located at the back of the
control panel.

The display (D) shows a series of messages, which can be grouped as follows:

A - Messages when turning on and with the machine stopped at the

end of the cycle. B - Messages during normal operating operation.
C - Messages resulting from the interruption of the machine due to damage (intervention of a control sensor).
D - Messages resulting from the activation of a keyboard function.
 Figure 3.2.3

3-6

EXPLANATIONS OF THE DIFFERENT MESSAGES

A - When it is turned on, during the execution of the diagnostic checks, the display shows the code and the date of
issue of the release contained in the 2 EPROMS of the CPUs.

B - After the "flash" test, carried out at power-up and the initial diagnosis, if there are no errors, the following screen
appears on the machine display:

   
Machine type mmmm Rel. X.xx  

   
dd-mm-yy xx / xxxx / xx / xxxx  
       

where:
       

"MMM" ⇒ indicates the type of machine for which the program is configured, the code is the
    as always that later we find again in the editor for the types of
  machine.    
"x.xx" ⇒ indicates the version of the program.    
"dd-mm-yy" ⇒ is the program's broadcast date and is expressed in day-month-year.
"xx / xxxx / xx / xxxx" ⇒ is the identification code of the program.

At this point, pressing the "FAN ON" key, the following message appears:

*** ATTEND ***

Article elaboration

This message means that the machine is translating the data relative to the article and the size, selected by the
execution; After a few moments of the appearance of the same message, since the machine has already
compiled the article present in memory, the following operational message appears:

   
Art .: aaaaaaaa Tal .: b Zone: cccccccccc d  

   
Vel. eee Twists fff / ggg Ang. hhh  
           

where:
           

"aaaaaaaa" ⇒ name of the item currently running (max 8 characters).

"b" ⇒ number of carvings currently running (from 1 to 9).
"cccccccccc" ⇒ name of the currently running zone.
   
"d" ⇒ number of the currently running zone.
   
"eee" ⇒ actual cylinder speed, in rpm.
   
"fff" ⇒ cylinder turn counter, to be carried out in the currently running zone.
"ggg" ⇒ counter of cylinder spins, carried out in the area currently being executed.
"hhh" ⇒ angular position of the cylinder, in degrees (from 0 to 355); the present field is
Displayable only with the machine stopped.
       

C - See the description in chapter 7 "SELF-DIAGNOSIS".

D - See the description in paragraph 3.3.1 " Keyboard Programming Procedure ".
 3-7

3.2.4 Series of signals

The series, illustrated in figure 3.2.4, includes the following indications

- (a) “NO CYCLE / SLOW” (yellow):

. This lights up each time the "NO CYCLE" or "SLOW"

condition has been selected, using the
corresponding keys;

. it turns off when the "NO CYCLE" or "SLOW" condition

is de-entered using the corresponding keys.

- (b) ”RUN” (green):

. this remains on with the machine in operation;

. it turns off when the machine is interrupted.

- (c) ”STOP” (red):

. this comes on every time the machine is interrupted

due to damage, indicated by an appropriate
message on the display;

. This lights up every time the machine is stopped by

means of the red button "STOP" or by means of the
"STOP / ZERO" button.

NOTE: Every time a machine damage message appears on the

display, activation of the red "STOP" button restores
the indication, on the same display, of the current
phase of the machine cycle.
Figure 3.2.4

3-8

3.3 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES

Two different levels or programming procedures can be identified:

- 1 or LEVEL : Programming and operating procedure activated by the machine keyboard. 3.3.1.
    They comprise a set of procedures and functions, either for programming the
    parameters of the machine cycle, not closely inherited from the article and the size in execution,
    be for real and own immediately operative functions. Almost all the
    procedures can also be activated with the machine in cycle and therefore do not cause
production losses; such procedures are described in detail in paragraph
   
    3.3.1.

- 2 or LEVEL : Procedure for "Programming the article, the sizes and the drawing" (EDITOR) by means of a
    video terminal connected directly to the machine through the RS 232 serial line.
terminal is activated by the machine keyboard with function 101.
   
    L'EDITOR is perfectly managed also when the machine is in cycle, so
    so it is possible to create new articles and sizes or modify existing ones without having to
    interrupt the machine and lose production. The created or modified article is activated
    interrupting the machine to “zero”, selecting from the machine keyboard the item and the
carving interested and starting the machine again.
   
The article and size editing procedure is described in paragraph 3.3.2.
   

NOTE: Release 2.0 is the opposite of code 048-8052 - ∗∗ -0200.

3.3.1 Keypad Programming Procedures

In the administration of local keyboard programming, it is entered at any time of the machine operation.

- Press ”PRGM”; display:

Choose
Procedure No. xxx

- For the list of the different procedures (or functions), accessible to the operator, see figure 3.3.1, relative to the
menu of local procedures, keyboard.

Function Keys Enabled:

- "ENTR" Acquisition of dialed number (xxx = 000 - 999)

- ” ← ” Canceling the dialed number (Back - space)

- ”END” Exit local programming procedure, keyboard.

3-9
 Figure 3.3.1
3-10

3.3.1.1 Main Blocks

1 → RESERVED PROCEDURES

2 → MESH CORRECTION PROCEDURES

3 → SOCKS COUNTER DISPLAY PROCEDURES

4 → OPERATING PROCEDURES

5 → PROCEDURES INFORMATION STATUS MACHINE

Display:

→ 1 = Reserved Procedures 2 =
Mesh Correction
↓ scroll

- ” → ”, ” ← ” Scroll through the different menu blocks

- "ENTR" Acquisition of the selected procedure

- ”END” Exit the main menu

- "FNCT" Exit from a low menu

This example of "scrolling" the procedures is repeated in all the other menus and undermenu existing in the
management program (see figure 3.3.1)

3.3.1.1.1 Function ”011” → from ”Select Procedure ...” Function

”2” → for ”Direct Activation”

This function is special, because it can be activated directly by pressing the number key ”2”. The
function allows:

a) View, in "cm" or "inches", the width programmed for each zone.

b) Enter the value of the width effectively measured (for each zone or for each treatment at constant width, for
the zones with reduction, typically the leg), so that the machine's computer can activate the automatic
correction procedures in the next sock .

Display:

Zone: number name / t Unit meas. : cm

Width: ___ Measured: ___ Y: __, __

3-11
Where:

Zone: núm = zone number of the sock.

nom = relative name of the zone.

/ t = number of the right treatment of the zone, for example for the leg, as illustrated in figure 3.3.1.1.1.

1 = Leg / 1 (1 or right
treatment) 2 = Leg / 2- (2 or
right treatment)

Figure 3.3.1.1.1
   

Unit med. = unit of measure: "cm" or "inch".

Width = programmed width.

Measure = width actually measured; shows the same value of the programmed width, but you can
modify with the ” → ” and ” ← ” keys .
   

AND:--,-- = shows the value of the error "e" accumulated with the different manual correction operations.
  He value of "e" is steeped only by varying the item to be made with a timely
    confirmation from the operator; see function 110.
    The corrections introduced are acquired at the end of the current cycle and remain operative in the
successive cycle.
   
    All the data in the corrections are available in the file ”@ DATMAG1” and therefore
    can save on magnetic support.

Keys Enabled:

- "ENTR" Key to browse the different programmed zones.

 

- ”→” Key for 0.5 cm (1/4 ”) increment of the measured width value.

- ”←” Key to decrease 0.5 cm (1/4 ”) of the measured width value.

- ”END” Key to exit function and main menu.

3-12

3.3.1.1.2 Function ”030” → of ”Select Procedure ...” Function

”3” → of ”Operating Machine”
 Display:

→ 30 = Vis / In / Dec Socks Count

31 = Totalizer display ↓ scroll

This function is particular, because it can also be activated directly with the "3" key, thus allowing to speed up the
display operation.

The function allows:

a) View the counter of socks produced and the number of programmed socks, with the relative date and time on
which the counter was programmed (Function 160 - CALTIN COUNT PRESET).
Socks produced are not counted as socks in which the cycle has been altered by the RESET, NO CYCLE, MINI
CYCLE, SINGLE STEP commands, or carried out with ”High thread guide gaps” or in calibration (tarature).
When the number of socks produced equals the number of socks programmed, the machine can:

1) Stand without signaling

2) Stop with intermittent signaling

3) Only intermittent signaling

4) None of these

If the preset is equal to zero there is no control on the machine.

b) Increase or decrease the number of socks produced.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ”, ” ← ” Keys for ”scroll” type of function

- "ENTR" Keys to confirm selected function

- ”END” Main menu exit key

- "FNCT" Back to main menu key

3-13

COUNTER DISPLAY

Display:

Socks: 3253 Preset: 4000

     
    from 01/12/89 INC / DEC xx (example)
       

Keys enabled:
   
from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys to be able to vary the increment or decrement of cells with value "01 - 99".
  Default value = 01. The value "xx" programmed is valid if both fields are edited.

Display:
     
       

INC / DEC 01 (default value)

   

         

If, for example, you want to have the INC / DEC = 7 field, it is always necessary to enter two digits, that is, "07"; the
display shows:

INC / DEC 07

-”→” Key to increase the Sock value from ”xx”.

When the value of "INC + Socks" is greater than the Preset, the "Error" message will appear in the
"Sock" field.

-”←” Key to decrease the Sock value from ”xx”.

When the value of "DEC" is less than zero ("0") in the "Sock" field, the message "Error" will appear.

- ”END” Key to return to the main menu

3.3.1.1.3 Function ”031”

Display:

→ 31 = Totalizer display
32 = Optional counters ↓ scroll

This function allows you to view the total number of socks that the machine has made so far (max. 6 digits).

Along with the number, the date and time of the meter's last curb (function ”163”) is also combined.

3-14

Display:
            

Tot. socks: xxxxxx

     
    from: 12/6/1988 h .: 17:15 (example)
       

Keys enabled:
   

- ”END” Back key to main menu

   

3.3.1.2 Operational Functions Menu - 400 =

OIL FUNCTIONS (TIME)

- 420 = MINI AUTOMATIC CYCLE FUNCTIONS

- 430 = SLOW PERCENTAGE SPEED FUNCTIONS - 450 =

WIRE GUIDE NOZZLES PROGRAMMING - 460 = ELASTIC

FEEDER CORRECTION

Display:

→ : 400 = Oil Can (Time)

: 420 = Automatic minicycle ↓

3.3.1.2.1 Function ”400”

This function allows you to program the operation of the oil can.

Display:
       
         

Oil times (min / sec)

       
    I repeated: Duration:    
       

Ripetic: indicates every few minutes to activate the oil can.

 

Keys enabled :
         

-"→" Moves the cursor from one field to the other.

 

- from "0" to "9" Numeric keys to program the desired value.

 

-"←" Cancel the last digit entered.

 

- "ENTR" Confirm the programmed value.

     

Display:
       
       

→ : 420 = Automatic minicycle

   
: 430 = Slow speed programming ↓
   
           

3-15

3.3.1.2.2 "420" function

Display:

Automatic minicycle with high mouths?

IF NOT

This function serves to speed up the machine cycle by automatically keeping the nozzles high.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key with affirmative meaning (YES); in addition, it automatically returns to the operating functions menu.

- ” ← ” Key with negative meaning (NO); in addition, it automatically returns to the operating functions menu.
 Display:

→ : 430 = Slow speed programming

: 450 = Gap Programming ↓ scroll

3.3.1.2.3 ”430” function

Display:

Percentage of programmed speed: xx%

Minimum speed: yyy Rpm

This function is effective only when the machine is in ”SLOW”.

In this state, the machine reduces its own speed by xx% with respect to the programmed one, to a minimum of ”yyy”
Rpm (minimum speed). For example, if the speed reduction is such that the calculated one is below the minimum; the
operating speed will be the minimum programmed.

Keys enabled:

- from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys for "input" data

- ”→” Key to change the data field

- ”←” Key to cancel data

- "ENTR" Key to confirm programmed data and return to the operative functions menu

3-16

3.3.1.2.4 Function ”450”

Display:

High gaps stay?

IF NOT

With this function you can decide whether to automatically lower the gaps at each end of the cycle; if necessary, lift
them by means of the manual command.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Keys with affirmative meaning (YES)

- ” ← ” Keys with negative meaning (NO)

The two keys return to the operating functions menu.

3.3.1.2.5 "460" function

 Display:

* alim. he. 2 ^ supply xx%. alim.

he. 4 ^ feeding yy%.

This function allows correcting the speed of the elastic feeders with respect to what has been programmed in the
size data by means of the terminal editor (such correction is provided to cancel any mechanical / textile differences
between one machine and the other and not to correct programming errors).

The correction value is independent for each of the two feeders. The asterisk on the display indicates which of the
two values is being modified.

The value "xx" is expressed in thousands; therefore, programming a correction of "-53" means reducing the feeder
speed by 5.3%.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Increase the correction value

- ” ← ” Decreases the correction value

- "0" Curb correction

- "FNCT" Vary the increment / decrement value (1-10)

- "ENTR" Go from one feeder to another

- "END" Exits the function

NOTE: Correction is possible at any point in the cycle, also with moving feeders, and
  has immediate effect.
The correction has a single value for all areas of the sock.

3-17

3.3.1.3 Machine Status Information

- 050 = CYCLE TIME FUNCTION

- 051 = EFFICIENCY FUNCTION

- 052 = STOP TIME FUNCTION

- 053 = HOUR COUNTER FUNCTION

Display:

→ : Cycle time
: Efficiency ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key ”scroll” type function

- ”ENTR” key confirms selected function

- ”END” Exit programming

- ”FNCT” Main menu return key

3.3.1.3.1 "050" function

Display:

Cycle time (mm / ss / dd):

00:58:24

This function returns to the operator, on the display, the duration (MM / SS / DD) of the last cycle performed.

NOTE: The count starts at the beginning of the first zone and stops at the last zone. The weather is updated
  automatically each time a cycle is performed.

Keys enabled:

- ”END” Exit key to machine status information menu.

3.3.1.3.2 Function "051"

Display:
   

       
Efficiency: 98%
     
Total stop time: 34:56
          

This procedure displays the efficiency of the machine and the total stop time, in hours and minutes, of the last
efficiency step.

The efficiency calculation is carried out as follows:

3-18

First a cycle must be carried out, without stopping the machine, to measure the theoretical time. At this point a "reset
efficiency data" must be carried out and the theoretical cycle time programmed.

After this procedure, the machine updates the efficiency calculation every 5 minutes as follows:

Calctines produced Socks produced x Theoretical time

------------------------------ x 100 → -------------------------------------------------- -------- x 100
Theoretical socks Time considered

WARNING: Every ARTICLE or SIZE change it is necessary to steel and re-program the
theoretical cycle, otherwise the calculation carried out will be very approximate.
 

Keys enabled:

- ”END” Return key to machine status information menu

- "ENTR"Successive "step" key; display:

       
Do you want to steel the data?
     
If not
          

Keys enabled:

- ” ← " Negation key: exits

- ” → " Affirmation key; display:

Cycle time 00:58:24 (mm / ss / dd)

Do you want to update? (Y / N)
The cycle time is the one currently used to calculate the efficiency; it can be updated in the following two different
modes:

a) By pressing the "FNCT" key, the last cycle time measured directly on the machine is automatically acquired.

b) by ticking ” → ” (YES) if you have access to the next procedure that allows you to manually enter the setting for
the ”standard cycle time” for the sock in production.

Keys enabled:

- "FNCT" Cycle time automatic acquisition key

- ” → ” Affirmation key

- ” ← ” Negation key.
Returns to machine states information

- ”END” Back key to machine status information

If so, the display will show:

3-19

Cycle time (mm / ss / dd):

   
_________________
   
     

Keys enabled:
 

- from ”0” to ”9” Input data for time input

 

- ”→” Data acquisition key ”input”. Once the acquisition is finished, it returns to the machine status
information menu.

- ”←” Key ”back - space”

- "ENTR" "Input" data acquisition key. Once the acquisition is complete, return to the information menu
machine states.
 

3.3.1.3.3 Function ”052”

Display:

Machine at stop of: (hh: mm: ss):

00:00:00

This function displays the last stop time of the machine and therefore calculates the time that elapsed from pressing
the red button (STOP) or from the intervention of the sensor that caused the stop until the moment in which it is
pressed again. the green button (START) on the machine.

NOTE: The weather update is obtained each time the function is activated.

Keys enabled:

- ”END” Keys back to machine status information

3.3.1.3.4 Function "053"
 Display:
         

Machine in motion for (hh / mm):

     
    0000: 00  
       

This function displays the total movement time of the previous curb.

Keys enabled:

- ”END” Successive "step" key

Display:

Do you want to steel the meter?

If not

3-20

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Confirmation key for cancellation.

Return to the machine status information menu

- ” ← ” Key to deny cancellation.

Return to the machine status information menu

3.3.1.4 Reserved Functions

- 100 = MANAGE SERIAL LINES

- 110 = CHOICE ITEM / SIZE

- 120 = MANAGE PASSWORD

- 130 = AUTOTEST ENABLE

- 140 = AUTOTEST AND CONTROLS

- 150 = INITIAL CONFIGURATION

- 160 = PRESET SOCCER

- 170 = SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

Display:
 

100 = Serial lines management

110 = Choice of article / size ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

- ” → ”, ” ← ” Scroll of the different functions

- "ENTR" Acquisition of the pre-chosen role

- ”END” Back to main menu

- "FNCT" Exit to the top menu

 WARNING: The visualization and modification of internal values to these functions is enabled by the eventual key
previously programmed.

3-21

3.3.1.4.1 "100" function

- 101 = TERMINAL CONNECTION FUNCTION

- 102 = MAGNETIC SUPPORT CONNECTION FUNCTION

- 103 = PRINTER CONNECTION FUNCTION

3.3.1.4.1.1 Function ”101”

It requests the presence of a video terminal connected to the RS232 interface.

Display:

→ : Editor
: Utility ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

-”→” Choosing the function (Editor / Utility / Terminal Settings)

- "ENTR" Confirmation of the chosen function.

- ”END” Return to the menu "Serial Functions"

Upon confirmation appears on the display:

Terminal Connected ...

       
     

EDITOR: The "EDITOR" procedure is launched, for programming

  articles, sizes or drawings.

UTILITY: Enables the display of some parts of the memory of the CPU card,
  located inside the electrical cabinet.

This procedure is strictly reserved for Technical Personnel

 
MATEC .
 

TERMINAL CONFIGURATION: The machine sends a "data packet" to the video terminal that configures
  function keys and other parameters.
For manual configuration of all video terminal parameters
 
refer to paragraph 3.3.4.1.

3-22

3.3.1.4.1.2 Function ”102”

This function allows you to perform three types of bass functions:

to) RECEPTION (READING) → magnetic support, or another machine, connected to the

        RS 232 interface.

b) TRANSMISSION (WRITING) → to magnetic support, or another machine, connected to the

        RS 232 serial interface.

c) CANCELLATION → on the magnetic support.

NOTE: For magnetic support, the floppy disk (UFD) logger is understood.

All three sub-functions refer to the following objects:

a) Articles

b) Size / s

c) Files

d) Drawings

The "Files" are homogeneous blocks of data, exactly:

- File machine data → "@ DATMAC1"

It contains all the operating data of the machine (for example: SLOW, NO CYCLE, SPEED%, etc.).
 

- File mesh data → "@ DATMAG1"

  It contains all the typical data of the corrections of the mesh widths of the article.

- File terminal data → "@TERMDEF"

  It contains the data related to the type of terminal used by the operator.

- File default articles → "@DEFILEX"

  (X = number of the low machine type)
Contains the default for editing original article / size that must be loaded by UFD after each
 
memory initialization.
   

For any selection, the message appears on the display:

→ : Reading
: Writing ↓ scroll
      
 3-23

Keys enabled:

-”→" Scroll key for selection under-functions

- ”ENTR" Key to acquire the function

- ”END” Exit key to serial functions menu

READING (RECEPTION)

Magnetic support; display:

→ : Magnetic Support
 
: Machine connection ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

-”→” Key for ”scroll” function type

- "ENTR" Key to acquire the function

Display:
   
     

Enter the file number to load

   
    on the machine: xxx
     

Keys enabled:

- from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys for "input" data

-”→” Key for file number acquisition

- "ENTR" Key for file number acquisition

- ”END” Exit key. It also gets rid of any connection errors.

During the reception the following messages will be obtained:

3-24

             
 Display:

         
Magnetic support
       
      Conection    
               

       
↓      
Number of bytes (data) received; display:
         

               

" " → bytes (for Items / Sizes)

     
"Size/" → bytes
       
           
   

       
↓      
Display:
             

               
File: → " " (for Files)
     
→ bytes
         
               

       
↓      
Display:
             

               
He drew → " " (for Drawings)
     
         
Bytes →        
     

↓
Display:

Reading OK !!

- READING (Reception):

. From another machine;

. Select ”machine connection”;
. The display shows:

       

Machine ready
     
to receive
     
       

. Waiting for data from the other machine connected in transmission;

. See the description of the "WRITING (TRANSMISSION)" function on another machine, described more
later in this paragraph.
 

- ”END” Returns to the serial functions menu

3-25

- WRITING (TRANSMISSION):

To magnetic support; display:

 
 → : Magnetic Support ↓
: Machine Connection scroll

Keys enabled:

-”→” Key for ”scroll” function type

   

- "ENTR" Key to acquire the function

   

Display:
         
       

→ Tx: ”Articles / Sizes” ↓ scroll

   
    Tx: "Files"    
         

Choose Articles / Size, Files or Drawings to transmit; on the display you will find the list of articles with their relative
sizes, files or drawings present in memory.

Select the object to be transmitted, moving the cursor with the ” → ” key , and confirm with the ”ENTR” key.

If the object to be transmitted is a file or a drawing, the identification number (from 001 to 999) on magnetic support
is immediately asked; If the object is an article, it is possible to choose to transmit the complete article of all sizes,
the article with some sizes, or only some sizes, without the article data.

In this phase the display shows:

NAME ART / 123 (example)

     
    Sel. ^ art.    
         

O well:
     

       

NAME ART / 123 (example)

     
    Sel. size ^    
       

Keys enabled :
 

-”→” Key to move the cursor under the name of the article or under the number of the relative sizes.

- ”ENTR" Key to acquire the indicated choice of the cursor position:

 

. The cursor under the article name means "article with all sizes";
 
  . The cursor under the number of a size means "select it"  
  (an asterisk ”*” appears).  

- ”END” End of selection.

3-26

NOTE: In the case of transmission of size selections, it will then be possible to reload in a
machine, only if the item to which the same sizes refer is already present in its memory.
 

The display shows:

Article = NAMEART
 Sizes = all

To select the item, complete with all sizes, or if only some sizes have been selected, the display will show:

Item / Sizes = ” ←
” only sizes = ” →
”

↓
- Mark ” ← ” to transmit the data ”article” and the selected sizes;
- Mark ” → ” to transmit only the data of the selected sizes.

Display:

Tx file number:
NAMEART = Nr. Xxx

- Mark the identification number (from 001 to 999) on the magnetic support.

Keys enabled:

- from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys for "input" data

-"→" Key to acquire file number

- "ENTR" Key to acquire file number

- ”END” Exit key. It also gets rid of any connection errors

During transmission, the following messages will be displayed:

3-27

Display:

Magnetic support
Connectable

  ↓    

Display:
     
       

"NOMBREART" → bytes (for Items / Sizes)

 
"Size / x" → bytes
   
       

Number bytes (data) ↓    

transmitted      

Display:
     

File: → " " (for Files)

→ bytes

  ↓    

Display:
     
       

He drew → "" (for Drawings)

Bytes →    
       

 
↓    

Display:
     

Writing OK !!

- ”END” Returns to the serial functions menu

- WRITING (TRANSMISSION) : to
another machine.

- It is possible to transmit articles / sizes, files or drawings to another machine, connected by means of the RS
232 serial line.

- The other machine must be “waiting for reception”; See READING (RECEPTION) procedure.

- The selection modalities of the object to be transmitted is similar to the one illustrated for magnetic support
transmission, but in this case the identification number is not required: The data is transferred directly into
the memory of the other machine and is immediately available

NOTE: The connection cable can be supplied by MATEC, but it is also easily achievable; We report the following
diagram of figure 3.3.1.4.1.2.

3-28
 Machine-machine connection diagram

Figure 3.3.1.4.1.2

- CANCELLATION :

Magnetic support; display:

File number
     
    cancel: xxx  
     

Keys enabled:

- from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys for "input" data

-”→” Key to acquire file number

- "ENTR" Key to acquire file number

- ”END” Exit key. It also gets rid of any connection errors.

During the reception, in the cancellation phase, the following messages will be displayed:

Display:
   
     

Magnetic support
     
    Connected  
       

   
↓

Display:
   
     

Cancellation OK !!
     

       

- ”END” Returns to the serial functions menu

3-29

3.3.1.4.1.3 Function ”103”

This function carries out the printing of the article, the size and other, in a printer connected to the serial interface RS
232.

Possible selectable printers are:

1) Print resumptive article

2) General article printing

3) General size printing

4) Print article area data

5) Printing type article area

6) Speed printing

7) Printing sensors
8) Yarn map printing

9) Long / wide printing sizes 10)

Thread guide printing

11) Printing base selections

12) Printing association drawings

13) Printing machine status information

14) Printing press drawing

Display:

→ : Resumed article printing

: General article printing ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” ”Scroll” key to select printers

- ”ENTR” Key to acquire selected printing press

- ”END” Exit key; you enter the serial functions menu.

After having selected the type of printing, except the "Drawing Printing", the program visualizes on the display, all the
articles available in the memory with relative sizes.

3-30

Display:

→ : NOMART / 123
: A / 2/1 ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key to select items

- "ENTR" Key to purchase selected item

- ”END” Exit key; you enter the serial functions menu

Display:

→ : NOMART / 123
Sel. ^ art. /

- ”ENTR” Article confirmation.

In the case of drawing printing, the program shows all the drawings available in memory on the display.

Display:
   
 
→ : NOMDIB ↓ scroll
 : DRAWING2  
   

Keys enabled:

- " → " "Scroll key" to select drawings

- "ENTR" Key to acquire selected drawing

- "END" Exit key; if you return to the serial functions menu

Display:
   

     

Running press
   
     

When the program has sent all the data to the printer, it returns to the printers menu

Keys enabled:

- ”END” Key to return to the printing menu, enabled only by general article printing.

The printing procedure n. 14 "Printing machine status information" refers to the following data: Sock counter, Machine
efficiency, Cycle time, Total stop time.

3-31

3.3.1.4.2 Function ”110”

Display:

: Item / Size Selection

: Cancel Item / Size ↓ scroll

This function performs the following operations:

1) Item / size selection

2) Item / size cancellation
3) Drawings directory
4) Cancellation of drawings
5) Directory of selected drawings.

In the selection phase, the program controls whether any items are present in memory; If there is not, the function is
canceled and it returns to the reserved functions menu. Otherwise, by means of "scroll" the list of articles is displayed
to select the one you want.

Selecting the item means running it on the machine.

For cancellation, the procedure is analogous to everything previously described, but the result is the removal of the
selected item or size.

NOTE: It is impossible to cancel the article and the size that are running on the machine.
Cancellation is done in two ways:

a) ITEM + SIZE

b) SIZE ONLY

NOTE: It is not possible to cancel only the item data without the size data.

Keys enabled:

-”→" "Scroll" key function type

- "ENTR" Acquisition key of the function type (selection / cancellation)

- ”END” Back key to reserved functions menu

         
SELECTION
             

Display:
     
         

In progress: art: CIANFINO tag: 2

   
Confirm? (Y / N)
           

3-32

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key that has the function of confirming the article already in execution.
The reserved functions menu is re-entered.

- ” ← ” Key that has the function of changing the current article to select a new one.

Display:

→ : A / 2/one
   
: A / 8 / 123 ↓ scroll
     
         

Keys enabled:
     

-”→” "Scroll" key articles

     

- "ENTR" Acquisition key for a new item

   

- ”END” Back key to reserved functions menu

 

With the purchase of a new item, the display will show:

 

         
RINGO / 123
     
    Sel. size / ^    
           

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to choose the size

 (Scroll to the right). With this key one of the three possible sizes is selected, as in the example indicated
above.

- ” ← ” Key to select size

(Scroll left). With this key one of the three possible sizes is selected, for example previously indicated.

- ”ENTR” Key to purchase item and selected size.

Display:

Running: art: RINGO tag: 2

Confirm? (Y / N)

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key that has the function of confirming the selected item Display:

Sidewalk File mesh data?

Y/N

After selecting a new item, the machine display asks if you want to correct the mesh correction data, programmed by
keyboard; It is advisable not to cancel if the new article is similar to the previous one and it is advisable to cancel if
instead it is completely different in areas and types.

3-33

Keys enabled:

- ” ← ” Key that has the function of leaving the selected item.

- ”END” Key to return to the reserved functions menu

   

           
CANCELLATION
                

Display:
       

             
→ : A / 2 /one
       
: A / 8 / 123 ↓ scroll
     
           

Keys enabled:
       

-”→” "Scroll" key articles

       

- "ENTR" Key to confirm the cancellation of the selected item

   

- ”END” Key to return to the reserved functions menu

   

By marking ”ENTR”, the display will show:

       

             
A / 8 / 123
         
    Canc. ^ Artic   (example)  
           

Or display:
       

             

A/8 / 123
         
    Cancel size / ^   (example)  
             

3-34

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to select sizes or article (Scroll to the right). With this key one
of the possible sizes is selected.

- ” ← ” Key to select size (Scroll to the left).

With this key one of the possible sizes is selected.

- ”ENTR” Key to cancel item plus size or only size

Display:

Confirm the total cancellation

of the article RINGO? (Y / N) (example, cancellation of an
article)

or the display will show:

Confer cancellation of
size 2 of the RINGO item? (Y / N) (example, single size
cancellation)

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key that has the function of confirming the cancellation of the selected item Display:

Cancellation
 
Article (example)

- ” ← ” Key that has the function of leaving the selected item.

Display:

 
 Abandonment
Article (example)

- ”END” Key to return to the reserved functions menu

- Drawings Directory

Displays all the drawings present in the memory of the machine.

Display:

: xxxxxxxx
: yyyyyyyy

3-35

Keys enabled:
 

-"→" : To view the other drawings present in memory

- "END" : To exit the display

If there is no drawing in memory, the following message will appear:

Drawings not present

In Memory

- Cancellation of drawings

Cancel the selected drawing.

Display:

: xxxxxxxx
: yyyyyyyy

The present drawings are displayed with the modalities described above. Pressing "ENTR" you have:

Confirm cancellation
from the drawing: yyyyyyyy? (Y / N)

Keys enabled:

- "→" : To confirm cancellation of the drawing

- "←" : To cancel the cancellation of the drawing

Upon completion of cancellation, the following message appears:

Drawing canceled
Press "END"

The "END" key returns to the lower menu for Viewing / Canceling drawings.

- Selected drawings directory

This procedure is used to visualize the drawings in execution in the article that the machine is making.
   
 Display:
       

   
: xxxxxxxx  
    : yyyyyyyy  
     

Keys enabled:
     

-"→" : To view other possible drawings associated with this article

- "END" : To return to the drawings directory menu

This procedure can display from a minimum of 1 drawing to a maximum of 9 drawings depending on the number of
drawable that have been defined.

3-36

3.3.1.4.3 Function ”120”

Display:

Current PASSWORD: 0
New PASSWORD: 0

This function allows a key to be inserted into the machine to protect certain "Reserved" functions. (n.1xx)

The maximum number of programmable digits is "6".

In the memory initialization phase, the key is programmed with the value "0", or no key inserted.

Keys enabled :

- from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys for ”input” key

-”←” Key to cancel edited numbers (back-space).

- "ENTR" Edited input acquisition key.

  At this point the key has been acquired in memory; The display cursor starts to
  flash inside the character.

- ”END” Key to exit the function and return to the reserved functions menu. This key
explains the function itself only after you have purchased the key.
 

NOTE: - The key appears disabled by editing "0".

- In the event that the operator forgets the key, he must carry out the following operations:

a) Turn off the machine

b) Remove the CPU card

c) Remove the connection point (ponticello) relative to the reserve battery

d) Re-enter the connection point (ponticello)

e) Insert the card again in the position itself.

f) Turn the machine back on

g) Re-initialize the memory, referring to function 150.

 3-37

3.3.1.4.4 Function ”130”

- WIRE SENSOR CONTROL

- OUTPUT CONTROL

- WIRE GUIDE CONTROL

- PASSO-PASSO ENGINES DRILL CONTROL

- VOLTAGE CONTROL

- AUTOTEST GENERAL HABILITATION

This function performs the partial or total enabling of the diagnostic tests.

The principle of operation is as follows:

Each sub-function corresponds to a mask of "1" or "0", which indicate the diagnostic status of the item in question.

”1” = element that can be activated in the diagnosis

”0” = non-activatable element of the diagnosis

The operator, by means of this function, can enable the diagnosis, either the automatic one at power-up, the
continuous one during the cycle, the general function 146, the devices considered appropriate, or totally exclude the
under-function from the test. diagnosis.

Initially with the memory steeled by means of function 150, the test is automatically enabled only for standard
devices, normally mounted on the machine.

Display:

→ Wire sensor control

Control outputs ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

- ” → ”, " ← " "Scroll" key for the type of function selected

- "ENTR" Confirmation key of the selected function

- ”END” Control menu exit key

- "FNCT" Back to top menu key

3-38

WIRE SENSOR CONTROL

 
 Display:

Login / 1111111111111111
 
N.1 (example)

It is possible to enable or disable the test and control in the operational phase of each sensor.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move through each entry, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← ” Key to move through each entry, in the direction of the arrow.

- ”0” Key to deactivate the relative entry

- "one" Key to enable the relative entry

- ”END” Exit key to controls menu

OUTPUT CONTROL

Display:

OUTPUT1 / 11111111111111111011110010011111
 
N.1 / "command name" (example)

This function enables or disables the test and the activation of one or more output lines.

a) ”0” - Disables the selected output

b) ”1” - Enables the selected output

The display appears in four 32-output masks at once.

Each selected output is combined with the corresponding name, written in full.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move at each exit, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← ” Key to move at each exit, in the direction of the arrow.

- ”0” Key to disable the relative output / s

- "one" Key to enable the relative output / s

- ”END” Exit key to controls menu

- "ENTR" Key to move from 8 outputs to the right.

3-39

WIRE GUIDE CONTROL

 

Display:
 
Channel / 1111111/1111
 No. 1 ^ power (example)

This function is similar to the “outputs” test, with the difference that the thread guides are displayed and subdivided
for the 4 feeds.

The operating criteria is identical to the "output control" function.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move on the thread guide, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← ” Key to move in the thread guide, in the direction of the arrow.

- ”0” Key to disable the relative thread guide

- "one" Key to enable the relative thread guide

- ”END” Exit key to controls menu

PASSO-PASSO ENGINES DRILL CONTROL

Display:
 

Engine / 11100000
 
N.1 / motor function (example)

This function enables the control, in the operational phase, of the correct stepping of the three passo-passo motors ,
at each end of the cycle. The three engines perform the following functions:

- 1 = Reduction motor;
- 2 = Reserve;
- 3 = Antitwist valve motor (suction).

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move the cursor to the right.

- ” ← ” Key for moving the cursor to the left.

- ”0” Key for disabling the motor test determined from the cursor position.

- "one" Key to activate the motor test determined from the cursor position.

- ”END” Back key to the controls menu.

3-40

VOLTAGE CONTROL

Display:

Login/11111111
N.1 / "name"
To each record the corresponding name is combined, by extension (n. 4 reservations are present).

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move in each position, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← ” Key to move in each position, in the direction of the arrow.

- ”0” Key to disable the relative test

- "one" Key to enable the relative test

- ”END” Exit key to controls menu

AUTOTEST GENERAL HABILITATION

Display:

Do you want to enable the test?

(Y / N)

This function allows enabling or disabling the card test, carried out when the machine is turned on.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to enable the test.

- ” ← ” Key to disable test.

3-41

3.3.1.4.5 Function ”140”

- 141 = INCOME DISPLAY

- 142 = COMMAND OUTPUTS

- 143 = WIRE GUIDE COMMAND

- 144 = MOTOR COMMAND

- 146 = GENERAL AUTOTEST

- 147 = AUTOTEST DRAWING CARD

- 148 = ELASTIC FEEDERS COMMAND

Display:
       
         

→ View income
     
Control outputs ↓ scroll
   
       

Keys enabled:
   

- ” → ”, " ← " Scroll keys of the type of function selected

   
- "ENTR" Confirmation key of the selected function    

- ”END” Diagnostic menu exit key

   
- "FNCT" Back to top menu key
   

3.3.1.4.5.1 Function ”141”

Display:

→ : Normal inputs
: electronic thread stop

Allows you to select between the normal entries and the entries for electronic yarn sensors. The successive screens
are the same in both cases and the meaning is analogous.

Keys enabled:

-"→" Key to make selection

- "ENTR" Confirmation key of the input type
- "END" Exit key to controls menu

Display:
 

Login / 1111111111111111
 
N.1 / ”income name” (example)

This function displays the “0/1” status of 32 machine inputs, in two 16 masks at the same time. The
corresponding name is combined with each entry, in full.
The revenue update appears with a frequency of about half a second

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move through each entry, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← " Key to move in each entry, in the direction of the arrow.
- ”END” Exit key to diagnosis menu.

3-42

The following table lists all the input devices of the machine and the relative functions developed.

TABLE OF THE INPUT DEVICES "INPUT"

DEVICE
INCOME FUNCTION
"INPUT"

01 Home motor graduation

02 Home motor ring plates
03 Home suction valve motor
04 Cylinder advancement handle room
05 Zero cylinder
 06 STOP button
07 JOG button
08 START button
09 Stop movable tabs
10 Programmable stop 1
11 Programmable stop 2
12 stop heels needles
13 Stop tabs 1 ^ feeding
14 Stop tabs 3 ^ feeding
15 Stop tabs 4 ^ feeding
16 Stop thread cutter knife
17 Remote STOP / ZERO button
18 Active reserved battery
19 Reserve battery discharged
20 Stop sock expulsion bell
21 Thread cutter disc graft
22 Control sock passage
23 Prisoner oil
24 Elastic stop 2
25 Elastic stop 1
26 Programmable stop 3
27 Low transfer plate
28 Thermal motor + KO drive
29 Heel recovery stop
30 Thermal vacuum cleaner
31 Prisoner Air
32 Oil level

3-43

3.3.1.4.5.2 Function ”142”

Display:

→ : Solenoid valves command:

Light bulbs and relay
command

Keys enabled:

" → ", " ← " Keys to select between two types of outputs.
 
"ENTR" Confirmation key of the output type.
 
"END" Exit key to the controls menu  

Display:
     

       

OUTPUT1 / 11111111111111110101101011000110
     
    N.1 / "command name" (example)
       

This function allows you to view and modify the status ”0/1” of the 128 output lines:

a) ”0” - Disables output / s (OFF)

b) ”1” - Enables output / s (ON)

c) ”2” - Intermittent function (ON / OFF)

It is possible to command one or more outputs, contemporaneously or alternately.

The display appears in four 32-output masks at once.

The corresponding name is combined with each selected output, written in full.

The update of the outputs appears with a frequency of approximately one second.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” Key to move at each exit, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← ” Key to move at each exit, in the direction of the arrow.

- ”0” Key to disable the relative output / s

- "one" Key to enable the relative output / s

- "two" Key to enable / disable the output / s in intermittent mode

- "FNCT" Key to display, the position of the output name, the angular position of the cylinder. To get out of
  this state, there are two possibilities:

one) Move with the arrows, therefore the name of the output appears again, but after
 
    about a second returns to the angular position.

two) Press "FNCT" again; apparently no effect is received, but moving with
 
the arrows, the name of the output will be fixed.

3-44

- ”END” Exit key to diagnostic menu. So proto the key is pressed, exits eventually
modified are restored as in origin.
 

ATTENTION !: Do not restart the machine with the function active.

The following table lists all the output devices of the machine and the relative functions developed.

TABLE OF OUTPUT DEVICES "OUTPUT"

DEVICE
   
DEPARTURE FUNCTION
 
"OUTPUT"
   
01 2nd movement truck formation mesh 3ˆ feeding
02 1st movement truck formation mesh 3ˆ feeding
03 Bolt sponge 1ˆ feeding
04 Mobile leveler 1ˆ - 3ˆ - 4ˆ feed
05 2nd movement truck formation mesh 4ˆ feeding
06 1st heel stop movement
07 Cam jack 2 1ˆ feeding
08 Cam jack 1 2ˆ feeding
09 Elastic clamp 2ˆ feeding
10 1st movement truck formation mesh 2ˆ feeding
11 2nd movement truck formation mesh 2ˆ feeding
 12 Anticipation truck formation mesh 2ˆ feeding
13 Bolt anti-clockwise sponge 2ˆ feed
14 Selection stopped 4th feed
15 Bolt sponge schedule 2ˆ feeding
16 1st bolt movement needles unloaded 2nd feed
17 2nd movement bolt needles unloaded 2nd feed
18 Plate truck 1ˆ feeding
19 Cam jack 2 2ˆ power supply
20 Anticipation truck formation mesh 1ˆ feeding
21 Plate truck 3ˆ feeding
22 Bolt sponge 3ˆ feed
23 2nd movement bolt needles stopped 3rd feed
24 1st movement bolt needles stopped 3rd feed
25 Cam jack 2 3ˆ power supply
26 Cam jack 3 3ˆ power supply
27 1st movement truck formation mesh 4ˆ feeding
28 Bolt sponge 4ˆ feed
29 Bolt needles stopped 4ˆ feed
30 Plate truck 4ˆ feeding
31 Half sponge ring
32 Bead 4 thread retriever
33 1st movement output transfer jacks
34 2nd movement output transfer jacks
35 1st movement re-entry transfer jacks
36 2nd movement re-entry transfer jacks
37 2nd bolt movement needles unloaded 1st feed
38 Camón platinas heel
39 Thread guide nozzle 1ˆ - 3ˆ feed
40 Bead 2 thread retriever
41 Cam jack 1 1ˆ - 4ˆ power supply
42 2nd heel stop movement
43 Raising the transfer plate arm
44 Baja mesh training trucks 2ˆ - 4ˆ feeding
45 Mobile tongue stop
46 Bead 3 thread retriever
47 Heel thread retriever 1
48 1st mesh training truck movement 1st feeding
(follow)

3-45

TABLE OF “OUTPUT” DEVICES

DEVICE
OUTPUT FUNCTION
“OUTPUT”

49 Needle opener blow 1ˆ feeding

50 Needle opener blow 2ˆ feeding
51 Elastic clamp 4ˆ feeding
52 Lycra clamp 2ˆ feeding
53 Thread cutter disc graft
54 Graft guide nozzles
55 Oil Can
56 Transfer plate lowering
57 Thread cutter knife blow
58 1st movement bolt needles stopped 1st feeding
59 2nd movement bolt needles stopped 1st feed
60 Out 60
61 Out 61
62 Out 62
63 Out 63
64 Out 64
65 Lycra clamp 1ˆ feeding
66 Lycra clamp 3ˆ feeding
67 Mechanical needle opener
68 Low mesh 1ˆ feeding truck
69 Reserve EV 59
70 Jump plates 2ˆ feeding
71 Out 71
72 Movable thread guide nozzle 2ˆ feed
 73 Power 1 Thread guide 1
74 Power 1 Thread guide 2
75 Power 1 Thread guide 3
76 Power 1 Thread guide 4
77 Power 1 Thread guide 5
78 Power 1 Thread guide 6
79 Power 2 Thread guide 1
80 Power 2 Thread guide 2
81 Power 2 Thread guide 3
82 Power 2 Thread guide 4
83 Power 2 Thread guide 5
84 Power 2 Thread guide 6
85 Power 3 Thread guide 1
86 Power 3 Thread guide 2
87 Power 3 Thread guide 3
88 Power 3 Thread guide 4
89 Power 3 Thread guide 5
90 Power 3 Thread guide 6
91 Power 4 Thread guide 1
92 Power 4 Thread guide 2
93 Power 4 Thread guide 3
94 Power 4 Thread guide 4
95 Power 4 Thread guide 5
96 Power 4 Thread guide 6
97 Power 1 Thread guide 7
98 Power 1 Thread guide 8
99 Out 99  
100 Out 100
101 Out 101
102 Out 102
103 Elastic Feeder 1
104 Elastic Feeder 2
105 Out 105
106 Out 106
107 Out 107

3-46

TABLE OF “OUTPUT” DEVICES

 
DEVICE  
DEPARTURE FUNCTION
"OUTPUT"
 
108 Out 108
109 Out 109
110 Out 110
111 Out 111
112 Out 112
113 Out 113
114 Out 114
115 Out 115
116 Out 116
117 Out 117
118 Out 118
119 Out 119
120 Out 120
121 Out 121
122 Out 122
123 Out 123
124 Out 124
125 Out 125
126 Out 126
127 Out 127
128 Out 128

3.3.1.4.5.3 Function ”143”

Display:
 
 Channel / 111111/11110

No. 1 ^ power (example)

This function is similar to the one related to the outputs command (n.142), but it is related only to the
thread guides. The operational criteria is identical to the command outputs function (n.142).

Keys enabled:

- ” → " Key to move on the thread guide, in the direction of the arrow.

- ” ← ” Key to move in the thread guide, in the direction of the arrow.

- ”0” Key to raise the relative thread guide

- "one" Key to lower the relative thread guide

- "two" Key to raise / lower the relative thread guide intermittently

- ”END” Exit key to diagnosis menu. As soon as the key is pressed, the thread guides, eventually
modified, they appear restored as in origin.
 

WARNING !: Never restart the machine with the function active.

3-47

3.3.1.4.5.4 Function ”144”

Display:

→ : Sidewalk
 
: Singular movement ↓ scroll

This function allows the visualization and modification of the parameters necessary for the movement of the
step-by-step motors . The functions are distinguished in:

Mode : → Sidewalk
: → Singular movement
 
: → Repetitive movement
 

Type : → Absolute ⇒ (Address not settable)

: → Relative ⇒ (Address set)
 

Address : → Hours
 
: → Anti-clockwise
   

WARNING: Always carry out the HOME command of the motors before the singular and repetitive command. If that is
missing, the motors may not move from their momentary position.

Keys enabled:

-”→” Scroll key for the type of function selected

- "ENTR" Confirmation key of the selected function

- ”END” Exit key to diagnostic menu

 ENGINES DRIVING

Display:

Motor: 1 Steps: **** Type:***

 
Address: ******** Frequency:*** (example)
     

3-48

Keys enabled:

- "1" and "2" Numeric keys relative to the two motors (1 = graduation motor; 2 = plate ring motor). Other numeric keys
are not accepted.

- “ → ” Confirmation key of the selected motor.

- "ENTR" Confirmation key of the selected motor.

- "END" Exit key to diagnosis menu.

SINGULAR MOVEMENT

Display:

Motor: 1 Steps: 100 Type: Ass

 
Address: ******** Frequency: 75 (example)

Keys enabled:

- from "0" to "9" Numeric keys relative to the “input” data.

- “→” Key for changing the variable fields and the acquisition of the present data.

- “←” (back - space) key to cancel the edited data.

- "ENTR" Confirmation key of the edited data. Also, at the end confirm data, perform the command
  programmed.  

- "END" Diagnostic menu exit key.

 

- "FNCT" Key to return to the beginning of the test without having to exit the current menu.

REPETITIVE MOVEMENT
     
 Display:

       

Motor: 1 Steps: 100 Type: ***

     
    Address: ******** Frequency: 75 (example)
       

In this function the parameters "Type" and "Dir" are not editable, the test performs clockwise-counterclockwise
movement , therefore these parameters are automatically set by the test.

3-49

Keys enabled:

- from ”0” to ”9” Numeric keys relative to the "input" data.

- “→” Key for changing the variable fields and the acquisition of the present data.

- “←” (back - space) key to cancel the edited data.

- "ENTR" Key that confirms the edited data. In addition, at the end it confirms data, executing the command
programmed.
 

- ”END” Exit key to diagnosis menu.

- "FNCT" Key to return to the beginning of the test without having to exit the current menu.

Display:

Confirm programmed values?

(If not)

Keys enabled:

- ”→” Confirm affirmative to the programmed test.

- ”←” Confirm negative to the programmed test and return to the previous mask.

- "ENTR" Key that confirms the edited data. Also, at the end confirm data, perform the command
  scheduled.

- ”END” Exit key to diagnosis menu. It also serves to exit the operating condition of the
  motor.

- "FNCT" Key to return to the previous mask.

NOTE: At the execution of the command, the motor performs clockwise / counterclockwise movements, until the
operator wishes to exit with the "END" key.
 3-50

3.3.1.4.5.5 Function ”146”

Display:

Does it confirm the general test?

(Y / N)

It performs, for an infinite number of cycles, the hardware test.

This test is interrupted in the following cases:

. Exit by mistake;

. By pressing the ”END” key.

The execution of each test is conditioned by the enablement defined with function ”130”.

The general self-test can be launched by the operator if the machine is stopped at “zero”. The self-test (singular) is
also automatically performed every time the machine is turned on.

At the first reported error, the self-test is interrupted, indicating the type of malfunction; in the case of the self-test
when turning on the machine, if an error is signaled, the machine cannot start, but function 130 is accessible to
disable (eventually) the aborted test; then switch the machine off and on again.

Paragraph 7.2, of chapter 7, returns the list of error messages, generated by the diagnosis, with the consequent
actions to be taken.

3.3.1.4.5.6 Function "147"

This function is used to carry out some controls on the drawing card and on the selection groups. In
particular, carry out the following tests:

- General test card drawing

- Selector group test
- Singular selection test

General drawing card test:

As soon as the menu item is selected, a general test command of the drawing card is carried out: if all the test is
positive, the message will appear on the display:

Test OK
(Press "END")

Otherwise, a message will be issued that will illustrate which test has been canceled and which is the problem verified
on the drawing card.

Selector group test

Display:

GROUPS: 11111
Singular test n.

3-51

 
Keys enabled :

- from "0" to "9" Numeric keys relative to the number of tests and the selection of groups (only keys
  "0" and "1")
- "ENTR" To confirm the programmed data and move in the different fields: in the last
  field performs the command
- " → " and " ← " To change the type of test: singular, finite, infinite. If finite is selected, the “test
number” field becomes valid and must be programmed with the numeric keys.
- "END" Procedure exit key

If during the test a malfunction is verified and therefore the test is canceled, an appropriate message is issued, which
contains the cause of the error.

Singular selector test

Display:

X ^ selector group n. AND

Direction down
Keys enabled:

- " → " and " ← " To select the following parameters: GROUP (1--5), selector (1--8), direction (up, down,
up / down); up / down is a rapidly triggered consecutive up / down sequence. For
everything related to the parameters, the " → " key increases the value and
the " ← " key decreases the value.
 
- "ENTR" It is used to confirm the programmed data and move in the next field; the last
"ENTR" pressed in the address field causes the execution of the command.
 
- "END" Exit test procedure key.

If a malfunction is also verified here, as in the previous procedure, an appropriate message will be issued, containing
the cause of the error.

It could happen that the drawing card does not respond at all to the commands presented by the keyboard; in this
case the message is displayed:

Timeout card Pattern

(Press "END")

3.3.1.4.5.7 Function "148"

Display:

→ : Elastic feeder 2 ^ feeding

: Elastic feeder 4 ^ feeding

This function allows to verify the correct operation of the elastic feeders; It allows each of the two feeder motors to
rotate at low speed.

Keys enabled:

- ” → ” and " They allow the passage from one engine to another.
←"
Activates the test of a motor.
- "ENTR"
Stops the motor / exits the function.
- ”END”
The function is enabled only with machine out of cycle.
NOTE:

3-52

3.3.1.4.6 Function ”150”

Display:
 → : Serial port configuration
: Date / time programming ↓ scroll

This function allows you to configure the serial lines based on the desired device:

a) Terminal

b) Magnetic support

c) Printer

The configuration has no immediate effect on the line, in fact the programmed data is stored in the machine data file
(@ DATMAC1) of the permanent memory.

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key to select the type of function.

- "ENTR" Key to acquire function

- ”END” Exit function key

- "FNCT" Key to return to the main menu

Display:
   

→ Video terminal
 
Magnetic support ↓ scroll

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key for device selection.

- "ENTR" Key to confirm device.

- ”END” Exit function key

Display:
 

→ Baud rate Stop bits

Parity Stop bits

3-53

Keys enabled:
   

-”→” Key to select the different voices.

   

- "ENTR" Key that confirms the selected voice.

   
  The selection appears one voice at a time. For each selected voice the display shows the
  corresponding momentary value.    
 
 To modify the value, press the ” → ” key . At this point confirm the new value with "ENTR";
  An asterisk will appear near the selected voice, indicating the newly selected value.
  This procedure is the same for all selectable devices. For the data of
  configuration see paragraph 3.3.4.    

- ”END” Exit function key

   
  Before exiting the function, the following message will appear on the display:
           

Serial line configuration?

         
    YES / NO      
         

With the arrows ” → ” ” ← ” you can decide whether or not to save the new configuration.
   

Display:
       

         

: Serial port configuration

         
    → : Date / time programming   ↓ scroll
           

This function is used in the case that the operator wants to re-enter the date and time.

NOTE: The operation must be repeated after each memory initialization.

Keys enabled:

-”→” Scroll key for device selection

- "ENTR" Key to confirm the function

- "FNCT" Back key to main menu

- ”END” Exit function key

Display:
   

: Date / time programming

   
→ : Data memory initialization ↓ scroll

This function allows you to initialize the permanent memory of the system. It should only be done the first time the
machine is turned on, and in case of alteration of the data in memory.

WARNING: Before carrying out this operation, it is necessary to save, in the magnetic support, all the interested
articles / sizes and the files, because they will be completely canceled from memory.

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key to select the function

- "ENTR" Key to confirm the function

- "FNCT" Return fee to the main menu

- ”END” Exit function key

3-54

Display:

Confer? (If not)

- ”→” Key to confirm initialization

- ”←” Key to exit without initializing

Display:
     
 → Data memory initialization ↓
Needle number programming scroll

Programming number of machine needles

Display:

Number of machine needles

n. xxx

Program the number of needles present in the machine and press <ENTR>.

Keys enabled:

- "0", "9" To program the value

- “ → ”, “ ← ” To correct the value already programmed
- "ENTR" To exit memorizing the value.

In the "article elaboration" phase, it is controlled that the programmed number is among those existing for this type of
machine and that any drawings associated with the article have been created by the same number of needles with
which the machine is equipped.

In the event that these values do not correspond, the machine issues the following message:

Wrong number of needles

             
      or missing        
         

In the memory initialization phase, the number of needles is set to "0".

 

- <END> Exits without memorizing.

     

Display:
                 
       

Needle number programming

           
→ Programming actuator levels ↓ scroll
     
               

Actuator levels programming

Display:

Actuator levels x

Program the number of levels and press <ENTR>.

Keys enabled:

- "0", "9" To program the value

- “ → ”, “ ← ” To correct a value already programmed
- "ENTR" To exit memorizing the value.

3-55

This function is only useful in the case that the cylinder of the machine is replaced, going from one number of needles
to another, without replacing the actuators in the drawing.
For each number of needles provided, in effect, the machine has in memory the corresponding dimension of the
diagonal.
If perhaps the cylinder is replaced by another having a different number of needles and the dimensions of the
diagonal different from the previous one, the function for programming the number of needles and the next one must
be carried out, through which the dimension of the actuator will be entered, so that the machine can manage it
correctly.
Display:
   

Actuator levels programming

   
→ Motor regulation ↓ scroll
 Motor regulation

Since this function is very “delicate”, access is protected by a key: The programming value is "660527"; This key is
independent of the password, programmable through function 120.
Display:
         
         

→ : Straight motorbike
     
: Alternate motorcycle ↓ scroll
   
         
         

: Straight motorbike
       
→ : Alternate motorcycle
       
         

By pressing "ENTR" in one of the two previous messages, the display shows:
 

       

Kp: xxxx Ki: xxxx

     
  Kd: xxxx il: xxxx    

         
Keys enabled :          

- from "0" to "9" To program the value.

- " → ", " ← " To correct a value already programmed.

- "ENTR" To exit memorizing the value.

This function allows modifying the coefficients of the machine's motor regulation system (brushless).

Kp = proportional coefficient
Ki = integrative coefficient
Kd = derivative coefficient
il = limits of the integrative effect

Typical (default) values are the following:

Straight motorcycle - Kp = 70; Ki = 0; Kd = 8000; the = 0

Alternating motorcycle - Kp = 50; Ki = 0; Kd = 8000; the = 0

WARNING : The use of this function is strictly reserved for MATEC technical personnel.

The regulation of the parameters, described here, characterizes the dynamic response of the motorization system of
the machine, composed of:
- brushless motor;
- drive (driver) of the brushless motor;
- digital speed / position control;
- position transducer (incremental encoder of 180 pulses / turn), mounted on the shaft of the brushless motor.

3-56

Display:
   

Motor regulation
   
→ Type of plates ↓ scroll

Choosing the type of plates

This function allows programming the type of plates mounted on the machine; Such programming serves to carry out
a consistency check on the articles in order to prevent a sponge article from being sent into operation on a machine
that has the plates for the smooth mesh and vice versa.
Display:
       

Plate type:
   
    SPONGE
   

Keys enabled :
   
-"→" Change from SPONGE to SMOOTH
- "ENTR" To exit memorizing the value.

- "END" To exit without memorizing.

3.3.1.4.7 Function ”160”

- 161 = PRESET SOCKS COUNTERS

- 162 = PRESET REHEATING CYCLES

- 163 = TOTALIZING APPROACH

3.3.1.4.7.1 Function ”161”

Display:

→ 161 = Preset socks counter

162 = Reheat cycles ↓ scroll

This function allows:

a) Program the number of socks to be produced

b) Select what to do when the scheduled production is reached:

1) Stop machine

2) Light signaling

3) The two, (together)

4) None

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key of the function type

- "ENTR" Confirm key for the selected function

- ”END” Function exit key

- "FNCT" Key to return to the upper menu

3-57

Display:
               

               

Socks Preset: 12345

           
      Stop x Signaling and   (example)
               

Keys enabled:
         

- from ”0” to ”9” "Input" data for variable fields

         

-”→” Change key for variable fields

         

- "ENTR" Key to confirm the selected "input" data

   

Display:
               

             

Socks counter: 10000

           
      Sidewalk? (If not)   (example)  
             

Keys enabled:
         

-”→” Key with meaning of sidewalk of the socks counter.

   
  The sock counter preset menu is refreshed.          

-”←” Key with meaning of "no curb" of the socks counter.

   
You return to the sock counter preset menu.
           

3.3.1.4.7.2 Function ”162”

         

Display:
               

           
161 = Sock counter preset
           
→ 162 = Reheat cycles ↓ scroll
     
                 

This function allows programming a number of cycles for which the machine proceeds in "SLOW", after each
interruption greater than the programmed time (see also function 170, relative to "SLOW MODE").

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key of the function type

- "ENTR" Confirm key of the selected function

- ”END” Function exit key

- "FNCT" Key to return to the upper menu

3-58

Display:
     

       

Number of cycles in slow 10

     
    after 30 minutes stop (example)
     

Keys enabled:
 

- from ”0” to ”9” "Input" data for variable fields

 

-”→” Change key for variable fields

 

- "ENTR" Key that confirms the selected "input" data. you enter the sock counter preset menu.

3.3.1.4.7.3 Function ”163”

Display:

162 = Reheat cycles

 
→ 163 = Totalizing sidewalk ↓ scroll
This function allows you to view the total number of socks produced from the previous sidewalk, referred to as date
and time.

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key of the function type

- "ENTR" Key that confirms the selected function

- ”END” Function exit key

- "FNCT" Back to top menu key

Display:

Tot. socks: 10000

from: 11/15/95 h. 15:30

3-59

Keys enabled:

- "ENTR" Display mask exit key

Display:

Do you want to steel?

(If not)

Keys enabled:

- ”→” Totalizer sidewalk key. Re-enter the

sock counter preset menu.

- ”←” Key for not stepping the totalizer. Return

to the sock counter preset menu.

3.3.1.4.8 Function ”170”

Display:

→ : "SLOW" mode
 
: "NO-CYCLE" mode ↓ scroll
"NO CYCLE" PROCEDURE

The "NO CYCLE" operating command assumes two different behaviors, depending on the mode in which this
procedure is programmed:

- Unlimited "No Cycle".

In this case, the output of the operating state "NO CYCLE" appears only by pressing the relative command key.

- Temporary "No Cycle".

The machine remains in "NO CYCLE" until the programmed time expires.

"SLOW MODE" PROCEDURE

By means of a suitable procedure, it is possible to program the operation of the "SLOW" key: unlimited (it can only be
removed by eventual re-pressures by the operator), or upon expiration (removed after a number of cycles,
programmable keyboard).

If the key is programmed to expire, the machine will exit the "SLOW" state only after having carried out the cycles
programmed in function 162, for pre-heating.

Keys enabled:

-”→” "Scroll" key function type

- "ENTR" Acquisition key type function

- ”END” Return to reserved functions key

3-60

3.3.1.4.8.1 Function ”171”

Display:

SLOW MODE: (example)

unlimited

Keys enabled:

- ”→” Key for selection:

a) unlimited
b) Expiration

- "ENTR" Key to acquire the type of selection. Returns to reserved functions menu

3.3.1.4.8.2 "172" function

Display:
 

NO-CYCLE:
 
unlimited (example)

Keys enabled:

- ”→” Key for selection:

a) Unlimited
b) Temporary for "xxx" min.
- "ENTR" Key to acquire the type of selection, Returns to the reserved functions menu

In the case of temporary "NO CYCLE", the display will show:

 
         

NO-CYCLE:
       
    Temporary: xxx min   (example)
       

Keys enabled:
 

- gives ”0” to ”9” "Input" key numerical data for values of "000-999" minutes
 

-”→” Key to acquire the numerical data. Returns to reserved functions menu

- "ENTR" Key to acquire the numerical data. Returns to reserved functions menu

3-61

3.3.1.4.8.3 Function "173"

This function makes it possible to determine the operation of the electronic yarn sensors.

Display:

→ : broken thread
: thread not cut

Keys enabled :

- " → " Choice of function.

- "ENTR" Confirmation of the selected function.

- "END" Exit to the "reserved procedures" menu.

The two functions have an analogous mode of operation.

Display:

Allowed errors for Errors allowed for

broken thread: xx uncut thread: xx

The number of errors allowed for broken thread (or not cut) is programmed.
It is possible to program a number from 0 to 99. To program 0 means to disable the control.

Example: By programming 3 the machine is interrupted as soon as 3 consecutive errors are indicated.

Keys enabled :

- from "0" to "9" Numeric keys to enter the desired value.

- "ENTR" Confirm the programmed value and exit.

The "+" and "-" keys , which can be activated directly (without the "PRGM" key), are also enabled for the operation of
the yarn sensors .

Pressing the "+" key at any point in the machine cycle enables the machine's computer and auto-acquires, during the
successive cycle, the absorption sequence of the usable yarns. From the next cycle, the computer controls that the
same absorption sequence is achieved in all cycles.

Pressing the "-" key disables the control of the sensors until the end of the current cycle.

3-62

The following is a brief summary of the performance characteristics of the electronic yarn sensors:

1. Reading the status of the sensors every 20 ms regardless of the speed of the machine.

2. Identification of broken wire or cone end with display of the sensor number.

3. Identification of broken wire not cut or wrongly absorbed with display of the sensor number.

4. Saving the sample cycle in reserved memory.

5. Carrying out a self-learning sample cycle in manual keyboard command ("+" key) or in case of article / size
change.

6. Inhibition of the control until the next cycle in case of no cycle, minicycle, reset, singular step, high gaps,
calibration (tarature) or manual keyboard command ( "-" key ).

7. Only check for broken thread in case of high transfer plate.

8. Rehabilitation of the machine start in case of interruption by mistake by pressing the stop button.

9. Diagnostics of the sensors interface board at power up and its manual keyboard command.

3.3.1.4.8.4 Function “174”

This function, which can only be activated when the machine is stopped, allows programming the working positions
(in steps) of the step-by-step motor to control the plate ring. 16 positions are available.

All positions can be recalled, during terminal programming on the “typologies” screen (discussed successively, in
paragraph 3.3.2), for the positioning of the plate ring in the different phases of the machine cycle, but it is necessary It
is necessary to bear in mind that the first four determine the position that the ring assumes automatically in the
phases of alternate movement, and precisely:

position 1:decreased heel and toe phase- motorcycle schedule

position 2:decreased heel and toe phase- anti-clockwise motorcycle
position 3:increased heel and toe phase - motorcycle schedule
position 4:increased heel and toe phase - anti-clockwise motorcycle

There are two possibilities to program the 16 positions:

1. Manually enter the numerical value in steps.

2. Carry out the self-learning procedure for the automatic determination of the value in steps corresponding to the
desired position of the sinker ring.

Display:

x ^ ring motor
position: yyy

where: x = current position number (1 - 16)

yyy = programmed current value (0 - 349 steps)

3-63

Keys enabled :

" ENTR" displays the 8 positions in succession.

" FNCT" enables manual programming (enter the number of steps and confirm with "ENTR" or "END).
“ → “ activates the self-learning procedure:
Manually set the plate ring to the desired position and press the key: the machine automatically
measures the position of the plate ring and sets the new value.
" PRGM" allows manual motor movement.
"END" exits the function.

By pressing "PRGM", the following message will appear on the display:

Display:

Increment / Dec. Mot position xx

steps Keys ("+/-" "FNCT").

In the field "xx" the value "10" is displayed.

With the "+" and "-" keys it is possible to move the motor forward and backward 10 steps at a time.
By pressing the "FNCT" key, the value "1" will appear in the "xx" field; At this point, using the "+" and "-" keys , the motor
will move one step at a time, while pressing "FNCT" again in the "xx" field will return 10, etc. With "END" you go back to
the previous screen.
The data entered or auto-collected, are stored in the file @ DATMAC1 (therefore, they are characteristic of the
machine, not the article); This file is transmitted to another machine and to a UFD floppy, by means of the keyboard
function n. 102 (discussed above).
The file @ DATMAC1, beyond the data relative to the plate ring, contains the data for the programming of the oil can,
for the conditions of "NO CYCLE" and "SLOW", for the configuration of the serial lines and the name of the article. ,
currently running.

NOTE: With function 174 active, the START and JOG buttons are disabled; besides, they come
The step-by-step motors are de - fed to facilitate manual movement of the plate ring.
 3-64

3.3.1.4.8.5 Function "175"

With this function, two parameters are programmed to establish the operating mode of the reserved battery in the
event of a drop, or in the event of a power failure, of the line voltage.

1) Operating time of the reserved battery Display:

Backup battery time program (hh:

mm: ss 0 = infinity): xx: xx: xx

This parameter stabilizes the duration (in hours, minutes and seconds) of the backup battery operation, in the
absence of line voltage; at the expiration of the programmed time, the machine turns off automatically. By
programming "00:00:00" (default value), the battery will remain active until it is discharged (approximately 4 hours).

In case of intervention of the reserve battery, due to lack of line voltage, a message of "Battery intervention" is
indicated: in this condition, it is possible to turn off the machine by pressing the "F2" key.

NOTE: The backup battery only works if the machine cycle is not in position "0".

2) Delay time in the intervention of the backup battery in alternating movement

Display:

Battery intervention delay time

in alternating: xxx ms

With this parameter it is stabilized for how many milliseconds (default value "0") the indication of "Battery
intervention" must be ignored, before stopping the machine.
By increasing this value it is also possible to operate the machine in the case of very low line voltages (in such a
situation, in the phases of alternate movement, the machine is interrupted for "Battery intervention", due to the greater
absorption of engine part).

ATTENTION! : If the line voltage is interrupted, if perhaps a delay time different from the value "0" has been
programmed, the machine stops immediately; in this case, when the line voltage returns, the
machine does not start again regularly, but with a sudden jerk: this phenomenon always becomes
more evident with the increase in the value of the programmed delay time and can cause, in
extreme cases , the breakage of mechanical parts of the machine. If the user is obliged to
program a high value of the delay time (greater than 20/40 ms), it is advisable to turn off the
machine and return from position "0" of the cycle.

Keys enabled:

- from "0" to "9" Numeric keys to enter the desired values.

- "ENTR" to "YES" Confirms the programmed value and goes to the next field. After you have programmed the last
field, you exit the function.

3-65

3.3.1.4.8.6 Function "176"

Select < 176 >, < ENTER >; Consequently, the following dashboard will appear:
 Display:
     

       
message (A) → Turner programming
 
Reset default parameters ↓ scroll
   
     

From the previous message (A), selecting the item "Turner programming" and confirming by pressing the < ENTR >
key , the following panel will appear:

Display:
   

     
message (B) Flip (1 = YES): X initial lap: X
sequence duration: XX breath start: X sec.
 
     

- The "Flip" field asks whether to make the flip sequence operational (program 1) or not (leave the default value 0).
If the machine is equipped with a turning machine, you should always set 1, because it is not possible to unload
the sock without the help of the turning machine itself; vice versa, if the machine is equipped with a standard type
run, that is, without the turner, you should always set 0.

- The "initial lap" field indicates how many laps it is necessary to wait; from the beginning of zone 13 of "sock end",
before starting the turning sequence; generally, the default value does not ask to be varied.

- The "sequence duration" field indicates for how many laps the turning sequence is operative. If the laps in the
"sock end" zone are less than the "sequence duration", the machine will wait for the end of the sequence before
carrying out a new cycle; If necessary, the default value can be appropriately increased in long sock cases.

- The "start puff" field indicates for how many laps from the beginning of the sequence the puff (V2) remains active;
this value must be less than or equal to the "sequence duration"; if necessary, the default value can be
appropriately lowered in the case of long socks.

In the case that, in the fields related to the message (B), if you want to automatically return to the default values, in
the message (A) it is necessary to select the item "Restore default parameters" and confirm later, by pressing of the <
ENTR > key ; Consequently, the following dashboard will appear:

Display:
 

   
message (C) Confirm the programming of the values
  of default? (Y / N)
   

If the answer is affirmative, in the fields related to the message (B), the program automatically prepares the following
default data:

- "0" in the field "Flip";

- "0" in the "initial lap" field;
- "10" in the field "sequence duration";
- "3 sec." in the field "start puff".

NOTE: If the sock remains inside the turner without being unloaded, to unload it, just press the < 0 > key , machine
stopped, thus activating the turner itself.

3-66

3.3.1.4.9 Function "999"

It allows the complete reprogramming of the machine control software.

The operation must be carried out with the machine stopped.

Display:
 ATTENTION RECHARGE PROGRAM!
CONFIRM THE OPERATION (Y / N)?

By pressing "YES" you enter the procedure for receiving the machine control application.

Display:

Flash Eprom not program

[1] = Config rs232 [2] = Load Program

At this point, it is not possible to go back and the only operations allowed must be controlled by the configuration of
the RS232 serial line and the reception must be activated.

Only by turning the machine off and on again, it is possible to get out of this situation by returning to normal
operation.

Continuing in the application loading operation, check that the speed and type of transmission protocol is the same
on PC or UFD and on the machine. On the machine, pressing 1 displays the serial configuration panel.

Display:

Load Program
Work parameter xxxx-8-1-none

where "xxxx" can assume one of the following selectable values by means of the " → " and " ← " keys :

- 9600
- 19200
- 38400

The rate of 38400 is recommended and, only in the case of repeated errors during transmission, to switch to a lower
transfer rate.

By pressing the <END> key, the selected baud rate is confirmed.

At this point, with key 2, the reception procedure starts:

Display:

Wait to receive program

Press a key to continue

3-67

The machine, at this point, is waiting to receive the application.

In case you want to leave the reception, just press any key.

Once the transmission is started up, the machine starts up suitable functions for loading the application; In the event
of an error during reception and in some of the application loading phases, the procedure is interrupted and the error
is displayed on the machine panel.
In this case, check the connections and the transmission parameters between the UFD (or Computer) and the
machine, therefore retest the oppression.
In case of persistence of the error condition, call MATEC technical assistance.

In the case in which the application loading operation ends correctly, then the completion of a series of controls will
appear, the normal operating panel.
NOTE: to) In the Personal Computer, the application machine transfer is only possible through
    one of two MATEC programs, called "MWB" and "MFP".  

b) The application is provided on a suitable diskette. It is advised, if they have a unique

 
    copy of this diskette, to make a reservation, through the operating system command
    Personal Computer  
    DISKCOPY A: A:  
which guides the operator during the copy operation.
     
    Consult the MS / DOS operating system manual for new information.

WARNING : Function protected by password and effective only with the machine stopped.
 

ATTENTION! : - Given the delicacy of the operation, it is advisable to have the operation of
expert staff.
     

- The reserve copy of the UFD disk must be made on a disk from the same
   
characteristics of the original, therefore:
     

1.44 Mbytes
High Density
Double side
135 TPI

Keys enabled:

- "END" Key to exit the function and return to the selection of procedures, without doing any
operation.
 

- " → " Key that confirms the operation.

- " ← " Key to cancel the operation.

3-68

3.3.1.5 Connection of the Machine to the LWS Monitoring

System Attached functions:

function 104 Enabling connection to LWS

function 32 Programming of elimination and optional counters
function 180 Production quantity selection

3.3.1.5.1 Function “104”

- RS422 enable / disable

- Machine code introduction
- Enabling / disabling transparency: NOT ACTIVE

RS422 enable / disable

 Display:

→ : Enable / Disable
: Machine code introduction

This function allows:

1) enable or disable the RS422 line (ISM card, located at the top left of the “Interface” card) for connection to
LWS.
2) Steel (in the case that the option to enable the line has been chosen) the chronological memory of the
machine.

Active Keys

→ to go to the next function

ENTR confirm the choice

END exits function

Display

Sidewalk memory data

     
    chronological (YES / NOT)  
     

Active Keys

AND IT IS sidewalk the chronological memory and exits the function

NOT chronological memory does not pause and exits the function

NOTE: if the RS422 line is enabled, the two LEDs on the ISM card should both be
lit (otherwise they are off).

3-69

Chronological memory

In the machine a part of the reserved memory of the CPU is destined to contain chronological data and production
data. When the connection is not enabled or the LWS system is not active, the machine accumulates its
chronological data in this part of the memory and this data will be sent to LWS as soon as the connection is
restored; In the event that it is decided not to send the accumulated information because it is not significant, use
the "chronological memory reference" option described above.

Example

In case of maintenance of a machine it is advisable to disable the connection to LWS, but at the moment when the
jobs are finished and the machine is reconnected, check all the accumulated chronological data, because they are
not significant for the monitoring of the same machine.

Machine code introduction

Display:

Machine code
 Active Keys

0 .. 9 They allow you to enter a machine code that must be between 1..30 to be recognized
  by LWS.
  Within the same line of machines, no two machines can be with the same code
(I mean they would cause big problems to the transmission line).
 

ENTR confirm the programming of the code.

NOTE: In order to program the machine code, the RS422 line must be disabled.

Operation to perform for LWS connection

After having connected the serial cable to the appropriate connector on the ISM card (RS422), the "Enter machine
code" function must be carried out, and then the RS422 enable function.

NOTE: The first time at all that the machine is connected, at the time of enabling the
  line also carry out the chronological memory checking (see previous description).
  The third operation to carry out is to select an item on the machine, so that
  LWS is also informed and that the socks arriving from the machine can be associated
to a precise article.
 

NOTE: The first time at all that a machine is connected to LWS, an item must be selected (also the same thing
currently running) because otherwise at LWS level it will not be possible to carry out investigations of
Production Data (see LWS manual). Also in the case of total curing of the LWS memory, in all the
connected machines the selection of the item MUST be carried out again.

3-70

3.3.1.5.2 Function “32”

Display:

Waste socks

Active Keys

0 .. 9 allows you to program a quantity of socks waste

→ go to the next optional counter; 8 optional counters plus the unmade socks counter are present in the
machine.

ENTR confirms the programmed quantities; After confirmation, such quantitative data is sent to LWS, and this
information is found at the research level "Production data" (see LWS manual).

3.3.1.5.3 Function "180"

Display:

TO)
Present Data
You want to select (Y / N)
 or B)
Data not present
requested from LWS
(Y / N)

A) It means that "New Operating Data" prepared in LWS and sent to the same machine are present in the machine
memory (see LWS manual)

Active Keys

END exits function

NOT exits function

AND IT IS causes the selection of the data present; that means that the first time the machine stops
  at zero and starts again, the new article provided for by the "New data
operational ".
 

NOTE: As soon as the "New operating data" is selected they become "Data
  running operations "and are modifiable only by LWS according to the procedures
described in the LWS manual.
 

NOTE: In the event that the "New operating data" is already present in the machine and by LWS they are
Other guests, those already present are lost.

3-71

B) It means that some "New operating data" are not present in the machine memory, but a request can be submitted
to LWS to receive such data if the operator has prepared them and left them in the LWS memory (see manual LWS).

Active Keys

END exits function

NOT exits function

AND IT IS causes the request of the data to LWS; appears:

Display:

Wait for LWS data

(timeout 5 min.)

If after the timeout of approximately one minute the data has not arrived, a signal is given to the operator, otherwise it
returns to the condition described in point A.

Cycle time calculation after an article / size change (function 110 or 180)

When the machine starts up after a new article or a new size has been selected, the procedure for calculating the
time taken to make a sock is automatically enabled; the time calculated is relative to the third complete sock cycle,
after the start (therefore abbreviated cycles are eliminated, eg, MINICYCLE, or cycles during which the stops have
been verified).
When the machine has calculated the cycle time, it sends it to LWS, which uses it for efficiency calculations; Until the
cycle time is defined, the efficiency is 0.
In the event that the machine starts up at a low speed after the article change (SLOW key entered), the cycle time is
calculated according to the same procedure already described, but at the moment in which the SLOW state is
removed, the cycle time calculation is enabled again.
At the moment that the machine has calculated the cycle time at speed, the only possibility of modification is manual,
by means of the machine keyboard procedure, or by means of the LWS procedure (see LWS manual).

It is possible to manually program the cycle time from the beginning, so that the machine does not calculate it
automatically.

3.3.1.6 Error Messages Relating to Keypad Programming

a) "Non-existent article in memory"

This is due to the lack of the Item / Size in the system memory. Check if the Item has been previously canceled
or has not been loaded by magnetic support.

b) "Initialize Memory Error"

This error indicates that the memory data structure has been corrupted or not initialized; For this reason, it is
necessary to switch the machine off / on and carry out the initialization function ”150”.

3-72

3.3.2 Item / Size Editor Programming Procedure

- THE EDITOR is a TASK (that is, one of the "programs" of the machine) named EPS, which allows you to create,
read and modify articles and sizes.
The tasks work in a MULTITASKING type environment; This means that more processes (tasks), and among
these EPS, can operate concurrently and therefore also when the machine is in motion.

- THE EDITOR is activated by procedure 101, from the machine keyboard, described in paragraph 3.3.1 and
requires a terminal connection through the RS-232 serial line .
The connection of the terminal and its relative operation is described in paragraph 3.3.3.

- After activation, on the video terminal, the MAIN MENU is presented. Figure 3.3.2 describes the branching of
the menus of the different programming procedures and subprocedures, which are described below.

The accessible options of the MAIN MENU are:

- LISTING OF ITEMS / SIZES

- LISTING DRAWINGS
- CANCELLATION OF ARTICLES / SIZES
- CANCELLATION OF DRAWINGS
- EDITING ARTICLE / ORIGINAL SIZE
- EDITING ARTICLE / SIZE OF EXISTING
- ARTICLE / SIZE MODIFICATION
- ARTICLE / SIZE MODIFICATION IN EXECUTION
- EDITING DRAWINGS
- EDITOR EXIT

The selection of the options is very simple. The highlighted line of the greatest luminosity is moved from one line to
the other using the arrow directed upwards and the one directed downwards. Pressing Return confirms the choice of
the option highlighted at that moment and goes to another menu.
The choice of the option is achieved more quickly with the possibility of cyclically passing from the last option to the
first and vice versa, without having to go through the intermediate options.
It is advisable that the reading of this chapter of the manual be done with THE EDITOR available to be able to quickly
test in practice everything that is described .

3-73

- EDITOR procedures menu:

 Figure 3.3.2
3-74

3.3.2.1 Listing Items / Sizes

Entering this option the list of articles / sizes present in the memory of the machine is displayed. Each item can be
associated with a maximum of 9 sizes.

NOTE: It is appropriate to realize that the items are kept in the memory of the machine and that such
    memory has a limit. For this reason it is advisable to keep in memory only the most
    used for the work that is currently going to be carried out. The others can be saved and kept in
    floppy disks (with UFDs available) for future use.

Active keys

ESC : returns to the main menu.

F3 : flips the list up one page.
F6 : flips the list one page down.

NOTE: Obviously F3 and F6 become useful when the list includes a higher number of articles
which is displayed on a screen.
   

3.3.2.2 Listing Drawings

Entering this option the list of drawings present in the memory of the machine is displayed.

NOTE: It should be noted that the drawings are kept in the memory of the machine and that
    Such memory has a limit. For this reason it is advisable to keep in memory only the most
    Useful for the work that is currently going to be developed. The others can be saved and kept in
floppy disks (with UFDs available) for future use.
   

Active keys

ESC : return to main menu.

F3 : flip the list up one page.
F6 : flick the list one page down.

NOTE: Obviously F3 and F6 become useful when the list includes a number of drawings greater than
displayed on a screen.
   

3.3.2.3 Cancellation Items / Sizes

By selecting this option it is possible to cancel items / sizes. It is also possible to choose whether the entire article
should be canceled or which sizes are to be eliminated.
In the event of partial cancellation, the operator is asked to confirm the initiated operation.

Active keys

ESC : abort the operation.

CR : enter / un-enter the sizes to be canceled.
F1 : confirm the operation
F3 : flips the list up one page.
F6 : flips the list one page down.

NOTE: Obviously F3 and F6 become useful when the list includes a number of objects greater than
displayed on a screen.

3-75
3.3.2.4 Canceling Drawings

By selecting this option it is possible to cancel the drawings. The choice of the drawing to be canceled is achieved
using the arrows and confirming the choice with Return.

Active keys

ESC : returns to the MAIN MENU.

F3 : flips the list one page up.
F6 : flips the list one page down.

NOTE: Obviously F3 and F6 become useful when the list includes a number of objects greater than
that can be displayed on a screen.
   

3.3.2.5 Editing Article / Original Size

This option allows:

- the creation of a new article;

- the attachment of a size on an existing item.

The creation of a new item is verified by entering in the ARTICLE field a different name from the other items already
present in the machine's memory and the size number. It is good to note that, for size, you can choose any number
between 1 and 9 without necessarily starting from 1.

The creation of a new size is verified by entering in the ARTICLE field an article name equal to that of the article to
which the size must be attached and entering in the SIZE field a size number that has not been used.

It is possible to view the list of articles / sizes present in the machine's memory by means of the F10 key.

It is possible to program the name of the article by moving with the arrows on the desired name and pressing
RETURN. Such a possibility is useful during the creation of new sizes.

Article names cannot be longer than 8 characters. During the writing of the names, it is possible to make corrections,
cancellations (DEL key) and use the left and right arrows to reach any letter of the same name.

As a unit of measurement for widths there are two possibilities:

- centimeters (CM);
- quarter inches (INC / 4).

Successively, the number of machine needles for which you want to create the article / size is moved . It is possible
to specify only a number of needles foreseen by the default file loaded in the machine.

Finally, a menu is presented for the choice of the type of article, SPONGE or SMOOTH ; This choice is reflected in the
types and base selections of the different zones, in the type of heel and in the aspiration values.

NOTE: During the preparation of the article, there is a consistency check between the type of the article and the type
of the machine entered using function 150: in case of an error the following message is displayed on the
machine display:

Machine item
 
not coherent .41

Such control is carried out only in articles created with release 2.1 and later.

The next screen and the ZONE SELECTION MENU .

3-76

3.3.2.5.1 Zone Selection Menu (Original Article)

This screen shows two boxes:

FIXED ZONES: presents a list of zones for which the " default data " also exists . Such zones are associated with
conventional zone numbers from 1 to 13. The presence of the default is a convenience and
 does not prevent the user from creating a zone with its own characteristics associated with
a conventional number from 1 to 13. This last possibility is linked to the Type Z is as
follows:
The FIXED ZONES are listed according to an order that must be respected.

PARTICULAR ZONES : a particular zone has the same typology as one of the fixed zones; more precisely than the one
selected to precede it. Conventional numbers associated with such zones range from 20 to
29.
There are no controls on the names assigned by the user in the particular zones and
therefore it is possible but not advisable to use a name equal to that of a fixed zone.

Further down the screen another window appears:

SELECTED ZONES : it is used to display the list of the zones that make up the article being created; By moving the
brightest part with the arrows and confirming a choice with return it is possible to reach
those selected areas. In the event that the chosen zone is already present in the list of
selected zones, it must be canceled.

To select a PARTICULAR ZONE more actions are needed:

- a) Bring the brightest part in the PARTICULAR ZONES window on the line that has the conventional number that
you want to associate with the zone (it is not necessary to carry out any order in such association);

- b) press Return;

- c) choose the zone that precedes the particular zone (that is, it indicates where this particular zone is located with
respect to the others).

NOTE: the above zone must be chosen from the selected zones.

NOTE: the particular zone has, if there are no successive modifications, the same typology of the zone that precedes
it.

- d) indicate the name of the particular area.

EXAMPLE

Suppose the article has the following zones:

SELECTED ZONES 1/2/3/6/8/9/10/11/12/13

Suppose we want to reach the selected zones a particular zone, for example the number 20 placed after zone 6. Then
we have
SELECTED ZONES 1/2/3/6/20/8/9/10/11/12/13

Zone 20 has the same typology as zone 6.

Pressing ESC ends the selection operation of the SELECTED ZONES. Then it becomes possible to carry out the
ASSOCIATION OF ZONES / TYPES. Such procedure will be described in the following paragraph dedicated to the
PROGRAMMING MENU.

3-77

3.3.2.6 Editing Existing Item / Size

This option allows you to create a new article starting from an existing article.
Of the fields displayed, some must be entered by the user, others are automatically filled by
EDITOR.

Emerging article : The user must enter the name of the article used as the basis for the one being created.
 It is possible to view the list of articles / sizes present in the machine's memory by means
of the F10 key. To select the emerging article, simply move through the arrows on the
desired article name and press Return.
Taglas emerging : Editor automatically supplies the list of sizes present in the emerging article.

Destination article : name that is understood to be given to the new created article.

Copy sizes: entering this field, a window appears with the sizes present in the emerging article. Using the arrows to
move from one size to the other, pressing Return confirms the choice of the size to be
transferred to the destination item. By selecting a size already chosen, it can be removed
from the list of sizes to be copied.
With ESC the operation is canceled, which is reconfirmed with F1.
In addition, in this list, "size 0" also appears, which by selecting all the sizes of the emerging
article are copied.
At least one size must be selected.

Editing size : Size that is immediately available for editing operations, for examination or for modifications.

Measurement unit : allows you to choose the adopted measurement unit (cm or inch / 4).

Subsequently, if the emerging article is SPONGE, a menu is presented to choose the type of article, SPONGE or
SMOOTH ; By choosing SPONGE, no modification is made, while by choosing SMOOTH, some types and base
selections, the type of heel and the aspiration value to carry out the transformation are automatically modified; on the
other hand, it is not possible to collect a SPONGE article from a PLAIN article .

NOTE: During the preparation of the article, there is a consistency check between the type of the article and the type
of the machine entered using function 150: in case of an error the following message is displayed on the
machine display:
Machine item
 
not coherent .41

Such control is carried out only in articles created with release 2.1 and later.

The next screen is the ZONE SELECTION MENU .

3.3.2.6.1 Zone Selection Menu ( Refinished Item)

This procedure is operationally identical to the one already written in the paragraph EDITING ORIGINAL ARTICLE. .

The only difference is the date of the presence of a new window that displays the selected areas in the emerging
article and that therefore can be used as a reference.
EXAMPLE → Suppose that initially the article is made in the following way:

PREVIOUS AREAS 1/2/3/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13

SELECTED ZONES 1/2/3/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13

Suppose we want to reach the selected zones a particular zone, for example number 20, placed after zone 6. Then we
have:
PREVIOUS AREAS 1/2/3/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
SELECTED ZONES 1/2/3/6/20/7/8/9/10/11/12/13

Zone 20 has the same typology as zone 6.

Pressing ESC ends the zone selection operation, obtaining an article with the zones listed in the SELECTED ZONES
window. Then it becomes possible to carry out the ASSOCIATION OF ZONES / TYPES. Such procedure will be
described successively, in the paragraph dedicated to the PROGRAMMING MENU.

3-78

3.3.2.7 Article / Size Modification

This option allows modifying the ARTICLE DATA and the SIZE DATA of an article already present in the memory of the
machine. It is possible to choose the item / size to be modified in two different ways:

a) Enter the name of the article and press return. Enter the
size number and press return twice.
b) Press the F10 key: the list of articles in memory will appear on the screen; position yourself with the arrows on
the desired article and press return.
Enter the size number and press return twice. In both cases,
the PROGRAMMING MENU is entered.
 WARNING : It is only possible to edit articles of a lower type consistent with the one programmed in the machine, by
means of function 150 (paragraph 3.3.1.4.6).
COMPATIBILITY BETWEEN ITEMS CREATED ON "SPORT TA", "MONO 4 VERSION 0035" AND "MONO 4 VERSION 0040
- 0045 - 0050 (CURRENT)" MACHINES
There are compatibility problems between articles created on “SPORT TA”, “MONO 4 version 0035” and “MONO 4
version 0040 - 0045 - 0050 (current)” machines; the correspondence between the versions “0035” and “0040 - 0045 -
0050 (current)” of the “MONO 4” machine and the relative registration numbers is as follows:
- "MONO 4 version 0035" with cylinder diameter 4 " → registration numbers from 147000 onwards;
- “MONO 4 version 0035” with cylinder diameter 3 ”½ → license plate numbers from 247000 onwards;
- "MONO 4 version 0040" with cylinder diameter 4 "and 3" ¾ → registration numbers from 148000 onwards;
- “MONO 4 version 0040” with cylinder diameter 3 ”½ → registration numbers from 248000 onwards;
- "MONO 4 version 0045" with cylinder diameter 4 "and 3" ¾ → registration numbers from 148500 onwards;
- “MONO 4 version 0045” with cylinder diameter 3 ”½ → registration numbers from 248500 onwards;
- "MONO 4 version 0050" with cylinder diameter 4 "and 3" ¾ → registration numbers from 149000 onwards;
- “MONO 4 version 0050” with cylinder diameter 3 ”½ → license plate numbers from 249000 onwards.

The following table prescribes the actions requested by each case (when possible), in order to be able to adapt the
articles created in a certain machine model to another model, among those mentioned above.

MACHINE IN WHICH
MACHINE IN WHICH   
IT HAS BEEN CREATED OR  
MODIFIED ON YOU WISH TO MAKE THE  
INTERESTED ARTICLE INTERESTED ARTICLE  
MONO 4 version 0035
   
SPORT TA  
MONO 4 versions 0040 -
0045 - 0050 (current)  
SPORT TA
MONO 4 version 0035 MONO 4 versions 0040 -
0045 - 0050 (current)
MONO 4 versions 0040 - SPORT TA
0045 - 0050 (current) MONO 4 version 0035
     
NEEDED ACTIONS
     
To obtain compatibility, you must manually perform
the programming of the command "Graft cutter blade".
To obtain compatibility it is necessary to launch the editor in the
video terminal and activate the voice "article / size modification",
selecting the interested article: The editor will review,
automatically, all machine commands (including
programming the valve step- by -step motor command
aspiration); but the programming of the command "Graft blade
thread trimmer ”, must be carried out manually.
     
NOTE: If this procedure is not carried out, the machine will
in the preparation phase of the article, it will emit on the display
the following error message:    
ATTENTION! The article is incompatible  
with the machine version! .75
Compatible: no action is required.    
To obtain compatibility it is necessary to launch the editor in the
video terminal and activate the voice "Item / size modification",
selecting the interested article: the editor will review,
automatically, all machine commands (including
programming the valve step- by -step motor command
aspiration).    
NOTE: If this procedure is not carried out, the machine will
in the preparation phase of the article, it will emit on the display
the following error message:    
ATTENTION! The article is incompatible  
with the machine version! .75
Incompatible: transmission is prevented.
Incompatible: transmission is prevented.

3-79

3.3.2.8 Modification Article / Size in Execution

This procedure allows you to automatically enter the editing of the article / size currently running on the machine. You
enter directly the PROGRAMMING MENU without having to enter any data.

PROGRAMMING MENU

This menu, accessible by the procedures described above, allows modifying the ARTICLE DATA and the
SIZE DATA ..

Article data: Typologies definition

  Speed programming
  Stop programming
 
 Yarn map
  Long mesh coherent calibration (tarature)

Size data: Length / width programming

  Normal thread guide
Sacca thread guide
 
Association drawings
 

You will then see each of these procedures described in detail.

Active keys

ESC: Returns to the main menu.

3-80

3.3.2.8.1 Definition Typologies

By choosing this option, the ZONES / TYPOLOGIES ASSOCIATION screen is obtained, in which the zones that make
up the item in programming and the type associated with each of them are listed.

Active keys :
 

F1 : leads to the main menu.

F2 or ESC : leads to the programming menu.
F7 : transforms all default typologies into "Z" typologies.
F8 : summarizes all programmed output configurations.

The desired zone must be selected by means of the cursor.

There are two possibilities:

TYPOLOGY
 BASE SELECTIONS

Once TYPOLOGY has been selected in the "Chosen Typology" window, all the default typologies are listed.

It is possible to view the characteristics of one of the default typologies that can be associated with that zone: select
one of the typologies with the cursor keys and press the F9 key.
In the "chosen typology" window, all the available default typologies are listed. The "Z" typology is also present. By
choosing a default typology, this typology is associated with the area being modified: The default typologies are a set
of data already verified and do not need any modification before putting them into execution.
In any case, it is possible for the user to fully define a typology according to his needs: for such an object the "Z"
typology is provided.
By selecting such typology, it is asked to indicate a reference typology: if we indicate one of the default typologies, we
obtain that the Z typology will initially be the same as the one used as a reference; If we choose the Z typology again
as a reference, we will start from a completely empty typology.

We remember that the default typologies are already verified typologies and ready to be used (in this way the user can
quickly start producing articles); the particular typology (or typology Z ) is the one that the expert user can create
from his initiative, giving him the characteristics he deems appropriate.

NOTE: We consider an area characterized by a Z typology and suppose to select a default typology for this. The
procedure of this operation leads to the irremediable loss of the Z typology.

It is important to clarify that modifications can only be made in the Z typology and not : in the default typologies.
Indeed, the default typologies are made up of fixed and unalterable data available for:

a) be used as they are (because, exactly, they respond to the user's requirements);

b) be used as a safe base to build typology Z with characteristics similar to a default typology but with some
modifications.

3-81

USE OF DEFAULT TYPES

For the creation of a new article, in the machine, 13 fixed zones are available, illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.1a:

one - HOME CALCETIN

two - EDGE
3- EDGE TRANSFER
4- LEG
5- HIGH HEEL
6- DECREASED HEEL
7- INCREASED HEEL
8- TEMPLATE
9- DECREASED POINT
10 - INCREASED POINT
eleven - REMALLO
12 - DEHENEBRATING
13 - END OF SOCKS
 Figure 3.3.2.8.1a

Each of these areas can be carried out in different ways (typologies), depending on the item to be obtained.
There are some types already ready, to be loaded into the machine by means of the UFD, which allow to carry
out the most commonly produced articles. These typologies are called default typologies , and they remain in
a file called default file.

At the time of creating an article, it will be a question of choosing which areas should be present in the sock,
and which types to associate with each area.
(The procedure to do this is described in the appropriate paragraph).

Next, all the default typologies for each area of the sock are listed, with the description of the textile meaning
and the actions carried out by the machine.

NOTE: The names of the zones and the typologies in the default file are encoded in ENGLISH ,
therefore all users must refer to the numbers for the zones and the acronyms for
 
typologies in the creation of new articles.

3-82

DEFAULT TYPES :
 

ZONE TYPOLOGY

1) START CALCETIN A - START SOCK 1F1EL

  - STANDARD ONE FEED ONE ELASTIC -
  Start sock with the execution of an elastic cord (3 turns) in second
feeding. It should be used when you want to make a 2A, 2B or 2C edge; in
 
  In the latter case, it is advisable to increase the number of turns in this area.

B - START SOCK NO EL
 
- STANDARD WITHOUT ELASTIC -
 
  Home sock without elastic. It should be used when you want to make an edge
  2D or 2E.

2) EDGE A - DW 1: 1 1F1EL
- DOUBLE 1: 1 ONE FEED ONE ELASTIC -
 
  Loading transfer jacks for double edge in 1: 1 ribbed imitation with
  elastic on second feed and bottom mesh on first feed.
  Possibility to introduce a drawing in two colors for mesh range.

B - DW 1: 1 2F2EL
 
  - DOUBLE 1: 1 TWO FEEDS TWO ELASTIC -
Loading transfer jacks for double edge in imitation ribbed 1: 1 with
 
  the entrance of the second elastic, (positioned in fourth feed). The mesh of the
  background is made in the first and third feeding.

C - SW 3: 1 1F1EL
 
  - SINGULAR 3: 1 1 SUPPLY 1 ELASTIC -
  Unique 3: 1 ribbed imitation edge with elastic on the second
 feeding and bottom mesh in first feeding.
 
  You can continue with a leg in 3: 1 ribbed imitation 4A or 4C or
directly with the high heel zone 5A or 5D.
 

NB - If you want to make a simple edge and then continue with a ribbed imitation leg, you should not select the
transfer area during the composition of the article. Also, if you want to go directly to four sponge feedings with a high
heel area in the successive area, neither the transfer area nor the leg area should be selected. In addition, if you want
to make a simple edge and then continue with a sponge leg (one or two feedings) or continue directly with the high
heel area to enter the four sponge feedings, in the compilation phase of the article, if you select the transfer zone,
then creating a “Z” typology of the 3C or 3D typologies and manually removing the input and output movements of the
transfer bolts jacks (commands 33, 34, 35 and 36).

D - DW2 1: 1 1F1EL
- DOUBLE 2 1: 1 ONE FEED ONE ELASTIC -
Loading transfer jacks for double edge with the first part without elastic but with
some filanca passes in two feeds (1 ^ and 3 ^ feed) that then continues with a 1: 1
ribbed imitation with elastic in the 2 ^ feed and a feed of mesh (1 ^ feeding). When
this type is selected, it is necessary to have selected type 1B in the zone “1) START
CALCETIN”. Possibility of drawing in two colors per pass.

E - DW2 1: 1 2F2EL
- DOUBLE 2 1: 1 TWO FEEDS TWO ELASTIC -
Loading transfer jacks for double edge with the first part if elastic but with some
filanca passes in two feeds (1 ^ and 3 ^ feed) which then continues with a 1: 1 ribbed
imitation with the elastic in the 2 ^ and 4 ^ feed and two mesh feeds (1 ^ and 3 ^
feed). When this type is selected, it is necessary to have selected type 1B in zone 1)
START CALCETIN.

3-83

3) TRANSFER A - STD 3: 1 1F1EL

 
- STANDARD 3: 1 ONE FEED ONE ELASTIC -
 
3: 1 ribbed imitation edge transfer with elastic positioned at
 
second feeding and bottom mesh in first feeding. This typology is
used if coming from a type 2A or 2D edge.
 

B - STD 3: 1 2F2EL
- STANDARD 3: 1 TWO FEEDS TWO ELASTIC
3: 1 ribbed imitation edge transfer with elastics positioned on second and fourth
feed and the bottom mesh is made on first and third feed. This typology is used if it
comes from a type 2B or 2E edge.
C - EXT 1EL.X 1FTE
- EXIT AN ELASTIC FOR A FEEDING OF SPONGE - Transfer edge with exit of the
elastic of the second feeding and start of sponge in the first feeding. This typology is
used if it comes from a type 2A or 2D edge.
D - EXT 2EL.X 1FTE
- EXIT OF TWO ELASTICS FOR A SPONGE FEED - Edge transfer with exit of the
elastics positioned respectively in second and fourth feeding and start of sponge in
first feeding. This typology is used if it comes from an edge of type 2B or 2E.

4) LEG A - 3: 1 1F1EL
 
- 3: 1 ONE FEED ONE ELASTIC -
 
3: 1 ribbed imitation leg with elastic positioned second
  feeding and bottom mesh in first feeding. Possibility of introducing
 
a two-color drawing for each mesh pass. This typology is used if
 
it comes from a section of type 3A or from an edge 2C. Possibility of drawing to
two colors for each mesh pass.
 

B - 3: 1 2F2EL
- 3: 1 TWO FEEDS TWO ELASTIC -
3: 1 ribbed imitation leg with elastic positioned on second and fourth feed and
bottom mesh on first and third feed. By default, stripes made with the thread guides
available on the bottom feeds have been introduced. This typology is used if it
comes from a section of type 3B.

C - 3: 1 ENTER 2F2EL
- 3: 1 SECOND FEEDING AND SECOND ELASTIC INPUT -
 3: 1 ribbed imitation leg with second elastic inlet on fourth feed and second mesh
base feed on third feed. To be used when coming from an area in which a mesh base
feed is used in the first feed and only an elastic in the second feed, as for the 3A or
3C transfer.

D - 1FTE X PATTERN
- A SPONGE FEED FOR DRAWING -
Leg with the first feeding carried out by the sponge, with the possibility of
introducing a three-color pattern per mesh pass. This typology is used if it comes
from a type 3C or 3D transfer.
E - FR 1FTE X 2FTE
- TWO SPONGE FEEDS FOR DRAWING -
Leg in which one passes from a sponge base feeding (1 ^ feeding) to two sponge
base feeding (1 ^ and 3 ^ feeding), with the possibility of drawing to two mesh
feedings and one color. To be used when it comes from a 3C or 3D transfer.
F - FR 1FTE X 3FTE
- THREE FEEDS OF SPONGE -
Leg in which one passes from a sponge base feed (1 ^ feed) to three sponge base
feed (1 ^, 3 ^ and 4 ^ feed), recommended for medium articles with the use of elastic
yarns. To be used when it comes from a 3C or 3D transfer.

3-84

5) HIGH HEEL A - FR 1F1EL X 4FTE

 
- FROM A BASE FEED ONE ELASTIC FOR FOUR
 
SPONGE FEEDS -
 
High heel with entry of the four feeds to make sponge when
 
comes from a type 4A leg or a 2C edge with an elastic (2 ^
feed) and a mesh base feed (1 ^ feed).
 

B - FR 2F2EL X 4FTE
- FROM TWO BASE FEEDS TWO ELASTIC TO FOUR SPONGE FEEDS -
High heel with entry of the four feeds to make sponge when coming from a leg of
type 4B or 4C with the elastic in the second and fourth feed and with two mesh base
feeds in the first and third feed.
C - FR 1FTE X 4FTE
- FROM ONE SPONGE BASE FEED TO FOUR SPONGE FEEDS -
High heel with entry of the four feeds to make sponge when it comes from a sponge
base feed (1st feed) as in the case of the 3C or 3D section or a 4D leg.
D - FR 1F1EL X 2FTE
- FROM A BASE FEED ONE ELASTIC FOR TWO SPONGE FEEDS -
High heel with exit of the elastic positioned in second feeding and sponge start in
first and third feeding. Possibility of reinforcing in two feeds. This typology is used if
it comes from a type 4A leg .
E - FR 2F2EL X 2FTE
- FROM TWO BASE FEEDS TWO ELASTIC TO TWO SPONGE FEEDS -
High heel with entry of two sponge base feeds (1 ^ and 3 ^ feed) when coming from
a typology two base feeds (1 ^ and 3 ^ feed) and two elastic (2 ^ and 4 ^ feed).
Possibility of reinforcing in two feeds. This typology is used if it comes from a type
4B or 4C leg.

F - FR 3FTE X 1FTE
- FROM THREE FOODS OF SPONGE TO ONE FEED OF SPONGE -
High heel in a feeding with output of the 3 ^ and 4 ^ feeding. Possibility of executing
drawings with three colors per row. This typology is used if it comes from a type 4F
leg.
NB - If you want to make a zone or part of it half sponge, you must create a "Z typology" of the typology that interests
us and then remove command 30 (EV 22 - half sponge ring) for the whole area or for the part that interests us. It is
necessary to bear in mind that if the machine is equipped with “double plating” plates, there is no possibility of
making the half sponge and the total sponge in the same sock.
6) DECREASED HEEL A - FR 4FTE X RECIPR
 
 
- FOUR FOOD SPONGE FOR MOVEMENT
 
ALTERNATE -  
Alternate motion bead with decreased needles selected for use when sourcing from
four sponge feeds such as the 5A, 5B, or 5C high heel.
B - FR 4FTE X BAG
- OF FOUR SPONGE FEEDS FOR SACCA -
Heel to sacca to use when coming from four sponge feeds, such as the high heel 5A,
5B or 5C.
 C - FR 1FTE X RECIPR
- FROM A SPONGE FEED FOR ALTERNATE MOVEMENT - Heel in alternate movement
with decrease of the selected needles, it is used when it comes from a sponge feed,
such as the 4D leg.
D - FR 2FTE X RECIPR
- FROM TWO SPONGE FEEDINGS FOR ALTERNATE MOVEMENT - Heel in alternate
movement with reduction of the selected needles, to be used when coming from two
sponge feedings such as the high heel 5D or 5E or the leg 4E yes, in the phase of
article composition , we eliminate the high heel area.

3-85

E - FR 1FTE X BAG
OF A SPONGE FEED FOR SACCA -
Heel to sacca to use when coming from a sponge feed like the 4D leg.
F - FR 3FTE X RECIPR
- FROM THREE SPONGE FEEDINGS FOR ALTERNATE MOVEMENT - Heel in alternate
movement with reduction of the selected needles, to be used when coming from
three sponge feedings (1 ^, 3 ^ and 4 ^ feed) as leg 4E yes, in phase composition of
the article, we eliminate the high heel area.
NB - If you want to use the heel to sacca typology, in the composition phase you must have create an article with
the decreased heel area but without the increased heel area and you must continue with the typology 8B or 8F .
template

7) INCREASED HEEL A - RECIPR IN 1FTE

 
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT IN A SPONGE FEED -
 
Heel in alternating motion with increased needles selected from
use when coming from the diminished heel.
 
NB - If you want to make a “Y” bead, if you have to introduce two particular zones after the decreased bead that can
be called for convenience the first AND INCREASE and the second AND DECREASED, which must have completely
empty typologies without any configuration in the typologies as well as the base selectable ones. To obtain this, it is
necessary to select in the typologies of these particular areas the "Z" typology and again "Z" as the reference typology
and we will thus obtain a completely empty typology. The last thing to do is program the length that these two zones
must have: the length must be the same between the two zones and must have a value less than or equal to 20 turns.

8) TEMPLATE A - FR RECIPR X 4FTE

- ALTERNATE MOTION FOR FOUR SPONGE FEEDS -
 
  Template to four sponge feeds to use when coming from a
increased heel 7A.
 

B - FR BAG X 4FTE
- FROM SACCA FOR FOUR SPONGE FEEDINGS -
Template to four sponge feeds to use when coming from a 6B or 6E tapered heel.
C - FR REC X 4F.POLY
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR FOUR POLYESTER SPONGE FEEDS -
Insole with four sponge feeds with exit of the second feed after the heel, and then re-
enter together to the fourth feed after the first and third feed, recommended for
articles with the use of polyester yarns or of equivalent stiffness. To be used when
coming from a 7A augmented heel and if you have the need for this entry sequence.
D - FR RECIPR X 1FTE
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR A SPONGE FEED - Template to a sponge base feed
(1st feed) with the possibility of drawing in three colors for each mesh pass. To be
used when coming from a 7A augmented heel.
E - FR RECIPR X 2FTE
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR TWO SPONGE FEEDS - Template with two sponge
base feeds (1 ^ and 3 ^ feed) with the possibility of drawing two base feeds and one
color. To be used when coming from a 7A augmented heel.
F - FR BAG X 1FTE
- FROM SACCA FOR A SPONGE FEEDING -
Template to a sponge base feed (1st feed) with the possibility of drawing in three
colors for each mesh pass. To be used when it comes from a 6B or 6E diminished
heel.
G - FR RECIPR X 3FTE
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR THREE SPONGE FEEDS - Template with three sponge
base feeds (1 ^, 3 ^ and 4 ^ feed), recommended for medium articles with the use of
elastic yarns. To be used when coming from a 7A augmented heel.

3-86
9) DECREASED POINT A - FR 4FTE X RECIPR
 
- FOUR SPONGE FEEDS FOR MOVEMENT
 
ALTERNATE -
 
Tip in alternating movement with decrease of the selected needles,
use when coming from four sponge feeds as the template
 
 
8A, 8B or 8C. Or by not selecting in the article composition phase the areas
 
decreased heel increased heel and insole we can connect directly
after the high heel 5A, 5B or 5C performing the Tubolar.
 

B - FR 4FTE X BAG
- OF FOUR SPONGE FEEDS FOR SACCA -
Tip to bag to use when coming from four sponge feeds such as template 8A, 8B or
8C. Or by not selecting in the article composition phase the decreased heel,
increased heel and insole areas, we can connect directly after the high heel 5A, 5B or
5C.

C - FR 1FTE X RECIPR
- FROM A SPONGE FEED FOR ALTERNATE MOVEMENT - Tip in alternate movement
with reduction of the selected needles, to be used when coming from a sponge feed
such as the 8D or 8F template. Or by not selecting the high heel, decreased heel,
increased heel and insole areas in the composition phase, we can connect directly
after the 4D leg.

D - FR 2FTE X RECIPR
- FROM TWO FEEDS OF SPONGE FOR ALTERNATE MOVEMENT - Tip in alternating
movement with decrease in the selected needles, to be used when coming from two
feeds of sponge as template 8E. Or by not selecting in the article composition phase
the decreased heel, increased heel and insole areas, we can connect directly after
the high heel 5D or 5E or leg 4E if in the composition phase of the article we
eliminate the high heel area.

E - FR 1FTE X BAG
OF A SPONGE FEED FOR SACCA -
Tip to bag is used when coming from a sponge feed such as the 8D or 8F template.
Or by not selecting the high heel, decreased heel, increased heel and insole areas in
the composition phase, we can connect directly after the 4D leg.

F - FR 3FTE X RECIPR
- OF THREE FEEDS OF SPONGE FOR ALTERNATE MOVEMENT - Tip in alternating
movement with reduction in the selected needles, to be used when it comes from
three sponge feeds as the 8G template. Or by not selecting the decreased heel,
increased heel and insole areas in the article composition phase, we can directly
connect the 4F leg if in the article composition phase we eliminate the high heel
area.

NB - If you want to use the sacca tip type, in the composition phase you must create an article with the reduced tip
area but without the increased tip area and you must continue with the serration that has 11C type .

10) INCREASED POINT A - RECIPR IN 1FTE

- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT IN A SPONGE FEED -
 
  Tip in alternating movement with increase of the selected needles,
use when coming from the 9A, 9C or 9D tapered tip.
 

NB - If you want to make a “Y” point, you must enter two particular areas after the decreased point that can be called
for convenience the first AND INCREASED and the second AND DECREASED, which must have completely empty
typologies without any configuration in the typologies as well as the base selections. To obtain this, it is necessary to
select in the typologies of these particular areas, the "Z" typology and again "Z" as a reference typology and we will
thus obtain a completely empty typology. The last thing to do is to program the length that these two zones must
have: The length must be equal between the two zones and must have a value less than or equal to 20 turns.

3-87

11) BRACKET A - FR REC. X ROS.TE

 
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR “ROSSO” IN SPONGE -
 
Overlock for "ROSSO" type overlock in two base feeds (1 ^ and 2 ^
 
power supply) with the first turns of exit of the alternating movement in
sponge and then continue only with the nylon. This typology will be used when
 
it comes from a tip in alternating motion.
 

B - FR REC. X ROS.PL
 - ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR “ROSSO” SMOOTH -
Overlock for “ROSSO” type overlock in two base feeds (1 ^ and 2 ^ feed) with the first
exit turns of the alternating movement in smooth mesh and then continue only with
the nylon. This typology is used when it comes from a tip in alternating motion.

C - FR BAG X ROSSO
- FROM SACCA TO “ROSSO” -
Overlock for "ROSSO" type overlock made in two basic feeds (1st and 2nd feed). This
typology is used if it comes only from one end to the sacca.

D - FR REC. X ROSSO2
- ALTERNATE MOVEMENT FOR “ROSSO” 2 -
Special overlock for “ROSSO” type overlock, according to the new “ROSSO”
procedure. With this typology, if the machine is equipped with the specific Kit (code
AR1-9342-00-9), it will make a “slat turn” type remesh with a feed (1 ^ feed). If the
machine is not equipped with the previous Kit, it will make a normal remesh to a
feed. This typology is used when it comes from a tip in alternating motion

12) UNHEADING A - X ROSSO

 
- FOR “ROSSO” -
 
Two-feed reinforcement in smooth mesh for “ROSSO” type overlockers.

B - X ROSSO 2
 
 
- FOR “ROSSO” 2 -
 
Reinforcement of a smooth mesh feed for “ROSSO” type overlockers, according to
the new “ROSSO” procedure. It is used when it comes from a row
 
 
11D.

13) FINAL SOCKS A - CUT OFF

 
- SOCKS SEPARATION -
Sock separation and expulsion, step-by-step and final motor curving
 
 
of the textile cycle.

B - CUT OFF 2
 
- SOCKS SEPARATION 2 -
 
 
Sock separation and expulsion, step-by-step and final motor curving
of the textile cycle. It is used when it comes from a 12B splitting.
 

To conclude, we recall that the default typologies have been created by a machine equipped with “standard” plates,
therefore in the “sponge” areas the partializatris valve is working to reduce suction. If you have a machine equipped
with “double plating” plates in the “sponge” areas, it is necessary to have maximum suction, therefore it will be
necessary to deactivate the partialization valve with the keyboard function “130” to voice control outputs (OUTPUT 51
- EV 6) by substituting “0” for the value “1”.

3-88

CHART OF THE CHOICE OF THE FILE NUMBER IN FLOPPY DISK WITH DEFAULT DATA
N. NEEDLES DIAMETER FILE NUMBER
   
  CYLINDER 120   160 200
4" X
      
72 3 ”¾ X     
  3 ”½ X     

4" X     
 
76 3 ”¾ X     
  3 ”½ X     

4" X
      
80 3 ”¾ X     
  3 ”½ X     

4" X     
 
84 3 ”¾ X     
  3 ”½ X     

4" X     
 
88 3 ”¾ X
    
  3 ”½ X     

4" X     
 
96 3 ”¾ X     

  3 ”½ X     

4" X   ??  
 
108 3 ”¾ X ??
   
  3 ”½ X   ??  

4" X     
 
112 3 ”¾ X     

  3 ”½ X     

4" X     
 
120 3 ”¾ X
    
  3 ”½     ??  

4"     ??  
 
124 3 ”¾     ??  
  3 ”½     ??  

4"     ??  
 
132 3 ”¾ ??
     
  3 ”½     ??  

4"     ??  
 
140 3 ”¾     ??  
  3 ”½     ??  

4"     ??  
 
144 3 ”¾     ??  

3 ”½ ??
       
4"     ??  
 
160 3 ”¾     ??  

  3 ”½     ??  

4"      ??
 
168 3 ”¾      ??
3 ”½ ??
      
4"      ??
 
176 3 ”¾      ??
  3 "½      ??
4"      ??
 
200 3 "¾      ??
3 "½ ??
      
X = for machines with the number of channels of the transfer plate equal to the number of channels of the cylinder.

{ = for machines with the number of channels of the transfer plate corresponding to half the number of channels of
the cylinder.
?? = for machines with mechanical needle opener.

3-89

EXAMPLES OF ARTICLES :

Art. TENNIS 1

”Tennis” sock drawn on the leg and with double border; see figure 3.3.2.8.1b.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two TO
3 TO
4 TO
5 TO
6 TO
7 TO
8 TO
 9 TO
10 TO
eleven B
12 TO
13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1b

Art. TENNIS 2

Sock with drawn leg and under leg (particular zone "20") with entry into 2nd feed; see figure 3.3.2.8.1c.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two TO
3 TO
4 TO
twenty C
5 B
6 TO
7 TO
8 TO
9 TO
10 TO
eleven B
12 TO
13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1c

3-90

Art. TENNIS 3

Single edge sock with 1 feed, 1 elastic and leg with entry into 2 ^ feed and 2 or elastic; see figure 3.3.2.8.1d.
NB - If you want to make a zone or part of it in half a sponge, it is necessary to select a type " z " of the type
concerned and remove command 30 (EV 22 "half sponge ring") for the whole zone or for the part interested.
This procedure is valid if the machine is equipped with "standard" type plates; but if you have plates of the
"double plating for sponge" type, it is necessary to replace them with those of the "double plating for smooth
mesh" type in the area where you want to obtain the smooth mesh: in this case, it is not need to remove
command 30, mentioned above.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two C
4 C
5 Z (B)
6 Z (A)
7 Z (A)
8 Z (A)
9 Z (A)
10 Z (A)
eleven B
12 TO
 13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1d

Art. BASKET

Sock with edge and leg to 2 feeds and 2 elastics with stripes without drawing; see figure 3.3.2.8.1e.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two B
3 B
4 B
5 B
9 TO
10 TO
eleven B
12 TO
13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1e

3-91

Art. SPONGE 1

Sock with drawn edge and total sponge procedure; see figure 3.3.2.8.1f.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two TO
3 C
5 C
6 TO
7 TO
8 TO
9 TO
10 TO
eleven B
12 TO
13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1f

Art. SPONGE 2
Sock "All sponge" with edge to 2 feeds and 2 elastic with heel and toe to "sacca"; see figure 3.3.2.8.1g.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two B
3 D
5 C
6 B
8 B
9 B
eleven C
12 TO
13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1g

3-92

Art. SPONGE 3

Sock "All sponge" with edge to 2 feeds, 2 elastic with heel to "sacca" and alternate toe (or vice versa); see
figure 3.3.2.8.1h.

ZONE TYPOLOGY

one TO
two B
3 D
5 C
6 B
8 B
9 TO
10 TO
eleven B
12 TO
13 TO

Figure 3.3.2.8.1h
 3-93

If we had selected a type Z typology, we enter the typology programming. As can be seen in
figure 3.3.2.8.1i, the screen is subdivided into columns or fields .
Some fields are not accessible to the user because they are used by the machine to automatically supply the
information; in all other cases the passage from one field to another can be done with:

- TAB (The key is placed to the left of the keyboard, on the second line from the top): allows you to move from
  left to right. The operation is cyclical and therefore, if the cursor flashes, the
  find in the column to the extreme right and go to the first field accessible to the extreme
  left.

- BACK TAB: it works analogous to TAB but allows movement to the opposite side.

NOTE: There are fields that in turn are made up of more low fields (for example, COMMAND CONFIGURATION); in this
case TAB and BACK TAB produce movements within the same field of ten under fields at the same time.
In addition, movements between the fields can be done using the right arrow and the left arrow.
With the F7 key you go from one state to another, for example from display to modification.

Examined the meaning of the different fields:

CF : It is an inaccessible field and it displays the CONFIGURATION number, that is, of the line.
  A maximum of 32 configurations have been supported. Once the state is positioned at
Modification can be made by entering settings with the F4 key.
 
  The introduction creates a configuration placed after the one to which the cursor belongs
  lightning bolt and which is exactly the same as the latter.
  Canceling a configuration is done with the F5 key. The canceled setting is
  the one in which the flashing cursor is located.
In both cases, confirmation is requested by message.
 

TURNS : represents the number of relative turns, that is, the turns that separate the current configuration from the
  previous.    
  Values from 0 to 99 have been accepted.  
Obviously, for the absolute turn (in the zone) to which a configuration refers, it was valued by adding
 
  the relative turns of the same configuration and of those that precede it.

EXAMPLE
     

CF TURNS ABSOLUTE TURNS

one two two

 
two one 3 (2 + 1)
3 4 7 (3 + 4)
4 one 8 (7 + 1)
5 3 eleven (8 + 3)

3-94

POS ANG - Squeezes the absolute angular position into the turn. Values from 0 to 360 degrees are allowed. It is
important to bear in mind that the indication of the angular position is absolute between the
 rotation and that, therefore, the configurations that refer to the same rotation must have
increasing degrees going from one to the next.
In case of error, the screen output is not allowed: in this case, the correct setting is indicated.

MOT ASP : In this column the type of aspiration is programmed in the different phases of the sock cycle; the value
that is programmed is the position, in steps, of the step-by-step motor that controls the suction
valve.

Important positions:

60 → closed suction
120 → maximum aspiration
0 → antitwist aspiration (if the machine is predisposed)
60 ⎟ 120 → air partialization

MOT CUS : In this column the position of the "plate ring" is programmed in the different phases of the machine cycle.
The number corresponding to one of the 16 positions programmed must be programmed using
the keyboard function n. 174 (paragraph 3.3.1.4.8.4). In the configuration for viewing only the
previous zone (the first one at the top), the position of the plate ring at the time of entry into the
current zone is displayed.

ATTENTION! : In alternate movement zones, the plate ring automatically assumes (no
programming must be entered on the typologies screen) the following
positions:

decreased heel and toe phase - hourly movement: position1

decreased heel and toe phase - counterclockwise movement: position 2
increased heel and toe phase - hourly movement: position 3
increased heel and toe phase - counterclockwise movement: position 4

       

       

Figure 3.3.2.8.1i

3-95

Consider, for example, a setting that has 0 in the TURNS field. The value of the angular position that can be entered
must be greater than the present value in the configuration that precedes it because these are configurations that
refer to the same rotation.

EXAMPLES
one)

CF TURNS POS. ANG

one two 100
two 0 180
3 4 215
4 0 300

represents a completely correct situation.

two)

CF TURNS POS. ANG

one two 100
two 0 180
3 4 215
4 0 150

represents an unsupported situation. In effect, configuration 4 refers to the same absolute rotation of configuration 3
(absolute rotation 6) but the indication of the absolute position is not fair because 150 degrees are less than 215
degrees.

At the end of the procedure, a control is carried out to verify the correctness of the programming and, in the event of
an error, a message is issued with the number of the wrong configuration.

OUTPUTS / ENABLE : this field regroups 64 under fields that allow you to specify the behavior of the commands
connected to the 2 "output" cards, to enable the movement of the step-by-step motors , to
program the execution of a drawing. In particular, the last 8 under fields are related to
ratings.

NOTE: The values assignable to an underfield are 2:

- point "." <deactivation>

- the asterisk ”*” <activation>

The introduction and cancellation of "*" or "." it is done by consecutively pressing the space bar (that is,
the thickest key on the keyboard).

The name of the subfield occupied by the cursor can be displayed in a window at the top of the screen
by means of F10.

At the top right there is a help that displays the configuration number and the command number.

3-96

LIST OF DEPARTURES :

1) Advance truck formation mesh 1ˆ feeding

2) 1st movement truck formation mesh 1ˆ feeding
3) 2nd movement truck formation mesh 1ˆ feeding
4) 1st movement bolt needles stopped 1st feeding
5) 2nd movement bolt needles stopped 1st feeding
6) Bolt sponge 1ˆ feed
7) Mobile leveler 1ˆ - 3ˆ - 4ˆ feed
8) Advance truck formation mesh 2ˆ feeding
9) 1st movement truck forming mesh 2ˆ feeding
10) 2nd movement truck forming mesh 2ˆ feeding
11) Lower mesh forming trucks 2ˆ - 4ˆ feeding
12) 1st movement bolt needles unloaded 2nd feeding
13) 2nd movement bolt needles unloaded 2nd feeding
14) Bolt anti-clockwise sponge 2ˆ feed
15) Bolt sponge schedule 2ˆ feeding
16) 1st movement truck forming mesh 3ˆ feeding
17) 2nd movement truck formation mesh 3ˆ feeding
18) 1st movement bolt needles stopped 3ˆ feeding
19) 2nd movement bolt needles stopped 3ˆ feeding
20) Bolt sponge 3ˆ feed
21) 1st movement truck forming mesh 4ˆ feeding
22) 2nd movement truck formation mesh 4ˆ feeding
23) Bolt needles stopped 4ˆ feed
24) Bolt sponge 4ˆ feed
25) Selection stopped 4th feed
26) 1st feed plate truck
27) Flatbed truck 2ˆ feeding
28) 3ˆ feed plate truck
29) 4ˆ feed plate truck
30) Camón platinas heel
31) Half sponge ring
32) Bead thread retriever 1
33) Heel thread retriever 2
34) Bead thread retriever 3
35) Heel thread retriever 4
36) Mobile thread guide nozzle 2ˆ feed
37) Thread guide nozzle 1ˆ - 3ˆ feed
38) Mechanical needle opener
39) 1st movement output transfer jacks
40) 2nd movement output transfer jacks
41) 1st movement reentry transfer jacks
42) 2nd movement reentry transfer jacks
43) Lower transfer plate
44) Raising the transfer plate arm
45) Thread cutter disc graft
46) Cam jack 1 1ˆ - 4ˆ power supply
47) Cam jack 2 1ˆ power supply
48) Cam jack 1 2ˆ power supply
49) Cam jack 2 2ˆ power supply
50) Cam jack 2 3ˆ power supply
51) Cam jack 3 3ˆ power supply
52) Stop movable needle tabs
53) 1st heel stop movement
54) 2nd heel stop movement
55) 1ˆ feeding needle opener blow
56) 2nd feeding needle opener blow
57) Lower mesh 1ˆ feeding truck
58) Reserve EV 59
59) Out 99
60) Out 100
61) Out 101
62) Out 60

List of ratings :

63) Grading motor

64) Alternate movement

3-97

PROGRAMMING THE ALTERNATE MOVEMENT

The alternate movement is programmed through column 56 of the typologies.

It is composed of two phases: of the "diminished" and of the "increased"; In the first phase, the part of the needles
that forms the heel progressively decreases with each pendolation, while in the second it increases.

The two phases are carried out by means of two zones of the sock.

The alternate movement is made up of three zones, if you want to perform the "extended heel"; in this case the first
zone will be relative to the "increased", the second to the "decreased" and the third again to the "increased".
Such functionality is selectable with the F9 key, as described later.

a) Entry into alternate movement and phase of the "handicapped"

The area can be subdivided into a first part of "preparation", which comes with normal rectilinear movement, and a
second part, in which are the pendolations.

The last turn of rectilinear movement (entry turn in alternating movement) is identified by the first "*" of column 56;
Such a turn has a length of 260 o , for which typologies or thread guide configurations can be programmed with
variable angular position between 0 o and 255 o .

The different lengths have an amplitude of 445 o and type and thread guide configurations can be programmed with
variable angular position between 0 o and 440 o , bearing in mind that the angular position does not refer to the zero
position of the cylinder but to the start of the cycle. pendolation and that the angular position of 0 ° corresponds to
the end of the previous operation.

Length of the area:

the area should have a length equal to the preparation turns plus the number of pendelations desired for the tiny
phase.
The entry turn in alternate movement must necessarily be compressed in the "change turns".

b) Phase of the "increased" and exit of the alternate movement

The different allowances are exactly the same as those of the handicapped phase.

The first turn of rectilinear movement after the pendolations (exit turn of the alternate movement) is identified by
means of the first symbol "." of column 56. Normally, such a turn coincides with the first turn of the zone after the
augmented ones.
To do this, it is necessary to enter all "*" in column 56 of the augmented area, and all "." in the successive zone.
The output rotation of the alternating movement has a length of 185 o and type and thread guide configurations with
variable angular position between 0 o and 180 o can be programmed , with the same warnings mentioned for the
perpendicures.

Length of the area:

the zone must be long equal to the desired number of pendolations, for the augmented phase.

3-98

Programming example (column 56 of the typologies) :

zone turn pos. ang. column 56

6 0 10 .
6 one 130 .
6 0 150 .
6 one 10 .
6 0 40 *
6 0 60 *
       

7 0 fifteen *
7 0 Four. Five *
       

8 0 twenty .
8 25 355 .
In this example, the machine will perform two "setup" turns in zone 6: turn 0 and turn 1. Turn 2 in
zone 6 will be the "alternate movement entry" turn.
For all remaining spins in zone 6 there will be perdolations of the "handicapped" phase.

For all of zone 7, the "augmented" phase will be suspended.

Turn 0 of zone 8 will be the "alternate movement exit" turn.

The remaining turns of zone 8 will be normal straight-line turns.

In the typology of the first entry zone in the alternating movement, by pressing the F9 key, a menu will appear, which
allows choosing the type of needle selection during the oscillations of the same alternating movement; Currently, the
following three options are planned for the mesh typologies in the "TALON" and "PUNTA" areas: "PLUSH", "SMOOTH"
and "PLUSH2". The mesh type "PLUSH2" is not displayed between the choices, but it can be entered manually in the
event that the mesh points of the fleece in the "HEEL" and "TOE" areas are excessively wide.
Pressing F9 again a new menu will appear, consisting of two voices: "STANDARD" and "EXTENDED".
To carry out the extended heel, three consecutive zones of alternating movement must be present: this is obtained by
programming, after the two zones of alternating movement assigned by the program, a "PARTICULAR" zone identical
to the previous one.
In the case that "EXTENDED" is selected, the machine automatically provides to modify the base selections of the
entry zone in alternate movement, taking into account the number of turns of which the zone is composed.

NOTE: In the configuration of the initial oscillation, relative to the "HEEL" and "TOE" areas, the characteristics that
distinguish the three types of mesh "PLUSH", "SMOOTH" and "PLUSH2", are the following:

- The "PLUSH" mesh type is characterized by the presence of a needle in a low position (with the head
itself at the height of the sinkers), placed between the first unloaded needle and the stopped needle.

- The "SMOOTH" mesh type is characterized by the presence of the stopped needle close to the first
unloaded needle, without the presence of any needle in a low position between them.

- The "FELPA2" mesh type is identical to the "LISO" mesh type, described above, but with the appropriate
type plates, which can be selected using function 150.

In the previous versions of the machine, for the "HEEL" and "TOE" areas, it is appropriate to verify the
accuracy of the association of all the data entered in the program, relative to the mesh types "FELPA" and "
SMOOTH "and the type of the plates selected using function 150: such data must be consistent, in order not
to determine any inconvenience in the desired item.

ATTENTION !: Never select the "SMOOTH" mesh type if you want to obtain a plush mesh and, vice versa, never select
the "PLUSH" or "FELPA2" mesh type if you want to obtain a smooth mesh.

3-99

Active keys

ESC : return to the previous menu (typologies association)

F1 : go back to main menu
F2 : returns to programming menu
F3 : scrolls back half a configuration page
F4 : enter a configuration (in MODIFICATION state, only type Z)
F5 : cancel a configuration (in MODIFICATION state, only type Z)
F6 : scroll forward half page of settings
F7 : change of state, only type Z
F8 : enter the editing of the base selections
F9 : selection type in alternate motion zones and heel type (STANDARD, EXTENDED)
F10 : command description

Pressing F7, the new status, Modification or Viewing appears (only for type Z). By pressing F8
you enter the programming of the base selections.

PROGRAMMING THE BASE SELECTIONS

In this procedure, illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.1l, the user programs the operation of the electronic needle selectors for
everything related to making the base selections.
To enter a configuration (rotation) it is necessary to activate the Modification state by means of the F3 key and then
press the F7 key.
A box appears on the screen in which you can describe the behavior of the selectors for a cylinder turn.
We examine the meaning of the different fields:

SPIN : It is the progressive number of spins entered; it is not accessible by the user.

SEL : It is the number of the group of selectors. There are 4 lines to be able to individually describe the behavior of
each group of selectors, plus a fifth line of "enablement".

In the "enable" line, if the symbol is ".", It means that for that specific needle we will have the base
selection enabled, otherwise the drawing.
At the exit of the programming form, the control will be carried out that one of the following sequences
is verified in the drawing / selection enable line:

SEL. - DIB. - SEL.

DIB. - SEL. - DIB.
DIB. - SEL.
SEL. - DIB.
SEL.
DIB.

In case of error, the procedure is not allowed to exit.

INIC.REP : It is used to indicate the starting turn of an eventual loop (in case the base selections are the same for
more turns).

NR.REP : Number of repetitions of the loop (zero means infinite, or for the entire zone). In the event that there is no
explicitly programmed loop, the last described turn is repeated infinitely for the entire zone.

NEEDLES : The user describes the behavior of the needle to needle selectors: <*> means
high selector (the needle picks up the thread)
<.> means low selector (the needle does not catch the
thread). To switch the symbol press the space bar.

3-100

At the top right of the screen a help is visible that displays the rotation, the selector and the needle corresponding to
the cursor position.
The screen initially displays only the first 56 needles; To view and modify the successive ones, use the "TAB" and " → "
keys on the last needle (56 °) and press " → ". In this way the horizontal scroll of half a page is carried out; in analog
mode it is possible to go backwards.
To cancel a turn, the F8 key is available (in MODIFICATION state).

To facilitate the writing of the base selections, the fact that these are generally uniform within a turn is considered, a
repetition command accessible by means of the F9 key (in MODIFICATION state) is available.

Pressing this key opens a new window, illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.1m, which fields have the following meaning:

REPEAT TURN : Number of the turn in which the repeat command is to be carried out.

START NEEDLE : start needle of the repeat module

NEEDLE STOP : end needle of repeat module

NUMBER OF REPETITIONS : number of times you want to repeat the module (0 means until the end of the turn).

After having programmed all the data, by pressing the "Return" key the selected module (from start needle to stop
needle) is collected "n" times from the next needle to the stop needle.
 Figure 3.3.2.8.1l

3-101

Figure 3.3.2.8.1m
   

Active keys

ESC : returns to the previous screen (typologies)

F1 : go back to main menu
F2 : returns to programming menu
F3 : change of state
F7 : enters a turn, active in MODIFICATION state
F8 : cancels a turn, active in MODIFICATION state
F9 : "repeat" function, active in MODIFICATION state

3.3.2.8.2 Speed Programming

The table allows the following data to be entered: gear and engine speed, acceleration and deceleration turns,
percentage aspiration in the different zones. In addition, another window is present to specify the operation of the oil
can, as illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.2.

We examine the different fields.

ZONE : supplies the complete list of numbers corresponding to the different zones
present in the article.
   

VC : represents the speed of change, that is, the speed of rotation of the cylinder in the turns
    defined as turns of change (between two zones) in the table of
    WIDTH / LENGTH.

GA : acceleration turns. Represents the turns used by the cylinder to go from the
    speed of change to the regime.
    Values from 0 to 9 are allowed.

VR : cylinder rotation speed at full speed.

Values from 0 to 500 revolutions / min are allowed.

3-102

GD : acceleration turns. Represents the turns used by the cylinder to go from the
    speed of regime to that of change.
Values from 0 to 9 are allowed.
   

OIL TANK DURATION : activation time in seconds of the oil can solenoid valve.

OIL TANK REPETITIONS : time in minutes between one activation and the next.

Active keys
 

F1 : takes you to the MAIN MENU.

F2 or ESC : leads to the PROGRAMMING MENU.
F7 : allows the passage through the window of the speed turns at the oil can and vice versa.

NOTE: the data referring to the oiler will be carried out by the machine only if in the
  corresponding keyboard function (procedure 400) the data entered is all zero.

     

     

Figure 3.3.2.8.2
 3-103

3.3.2.8.3 Programming Stop Sensors

In this table, illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.3, the intervention zones of the different programmable sensors of the
machine are programmed (I exclude the programmable electronic yarn stops in the YARN MAP table). Eight sensors
are programmable.

We examine the different fields:

Can . Sensors : Represents the number of the input (channel) to which the sensor is connected.

Zone : Non-editable field in which all the zones of which the system is composed are listed.
    Article.

Skilled. : Rotation of the zone from which the sensor is activated.

Off : Rotation of the zone from which the sensor is deactivated.

NOTE: It is also possible to program the deactivation of the sensor before its activation; in this way the sensor is used
for two sock cycles. Such functionality is useful for example: to control the ejection of the gate.

Active keys

F1 : Go back to the main menu

F2 or ESC : Returns to the programming menu
F7 : Allows you to go from the "sensor no." Field to the "activation / deactivation" field.
F8 : Since the programming is subdivided into two pages of four sensors each key
allows the passage from one page to the other.
   
     

     

Figure 3.3.2.8.3

3-104

3.3.2.8.4 Yarn Map Programming

In this table, illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.4, the different yarns are associated with the yarn guides.

NOTE: Only the yarn guides to which a yarn has been associated are enabled for operation, and therefore for its
programming.

Figure 3.3.2.8.4
   

Active keys
 

F1 : go back to main menu

F2 or ESC : returns to programming menu
F7 : yarn cancellation: note that this is the only way to cancel the yarn name (in
    effect the space bar has only a visual effect).
F8 : Activates a procedure (called SWAP) that is used to exchange two yarns between them:
    (in the example “COTTON 1” and “COLOR.1”)
- move the cursor to "ALGODON 1"
   
    - press the F8 key
    - go to “COLOR.1” press F8 again. at this point a modification question appears
    automatic. In the case of a positive answer, the
    programming of the two corresponding thread guides.

NOTE: It is possible to exchange two thread guides only if they belong to the same feed.

3-105

3.3.2.8.5 Calibration (tarature) Mesh Width Coefficients

Description of the general concepts:

Experience shows that the dimensions of manufactured socks are rather variable even if the parameters on which,
theoretically, such changes depend, are not modified. Among these parameters we can include all the functions
controlled by the electronic part and the mechanical characteristics of the machine.
Furthermore, there are other parameters that it is not lawful to consider constant even in theory; Among these, we
mention the type and tension of the yarn, temperature and humidity of the air.

Calibration (tarature) is a sequence of actions aimed at obtaining a mesh width as close as possible to the
programmed ones.
In particular, it is used to determine the relationship between the position of the graduation motor and the mesh
width.

Sequence of actions to "perform the calibration (tarature)"

**** IT IS POSSIBLE TO CALIBRATE ONLY THE ARTICLE IN EXECUTION ****

Calibration is performed one zone at a time.

In the screen of figure 3.3.2.8.5 the summary of all the coefficients is shown, in particular H1, L1, H2, L2, VEL, Z RIF;
such coefficients are not editable by the user, directly at this stage. The active keys are as follows:

F1 : back to main menu

F2 or ESC : return to programming menu
F8 : calibration (tarature) with reference zone
F9 : normal calibration (tarature)

The zone in which the calibration is to be carried out will be the one in which the cursor is positioned, at the moment
of pressing the F8 or F9 keys.

CALIBRATION (TARATURE) THROUGH REFERENCE ZONE

When the F8 key is pressed, the help message "Select the reference zone and confirm with F7" appears.

When the F7 key is pressed, it is controlled that the reference zone is different from the one to be calibrated (tare); in
the affirmative case, the coefficients H1, L1, H2, L2 and V of the second zone are copied in the first one and the
"reference zone" field of the zone in calibration (tarature) is updated with the code of the second zone.

If, during the selection of the reference zone, the ESC key is pressed, the "calibration (tarature) by reference zone"
process is immediately exited.

CALIBRATION (TARATURE) NORMAL

When the F9 key is pressed, a form appears containing the input data.
A sock must be made in which the zone to be calibrated (tare) is carried out in a particular way: it is divided into two
subzones characterized by a different position of the mesh control motor: and then the widths obtained in such
subzones (note that in the zones not in calibration (tarature) the machine performs the minicycle.

3-106

Data to enter:

H1 : Position in steps of the motor in the first subzone.

H2 : Position in steps of the motor in the second low zone.
G1 : Number of turns of the first subzone.
G2 : Number of turns of the second subzone.
V1 : Speed at which if you want to perform the calibration (tarature).

NOTE: A default is presented for all programming widths, but with the experience of
  The operator will be able to quickly decide which values, in particular H1 and H2, should be
  program to obtain widths close to those that will later be actually programmed in
 
size. (It is always possible to verify the result and repeat the calibration (tarature) with the values
various).
   

At this point, press the F7 key and, leaving the terminal in the current situation, start the machine. Therefore
measure the two pieces and program the requested data:

L1 : Width measured with motor in position H1

L2 : Width measured with motor in position H2

If it is considered appropriate to repeat the entire operation, press the F9 key. If you want to finish, press the F8 key.

Active keys
 

F1 : go back to main menu

F2 or ESC : returns to programming menu
F7 : before calibration (tarature) it assumes the meaning of frame change between the two zones
    present on the screen. Then it has the meaning of "calibration start (tarature)".
F8 : "calibration with reference zone", or "end of tarature calibration"
F9 : "normal calibration", or "abort"
     

     

Figure 3.3.2.8.5

3-107

3.3.2.8.6 Length / Width Programming

The data referring to the length and width of the size are entered in this table, as illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.6a; in
addition, the value of the speed of the elastic feeders is programmed.
We examine all programmable fields.

ZONES : is automatically filled by the EDITOR with the name and conventional number of the zones
    that have been selected for the article.

GVC : represent the number of turns at “rate of change”. Such turns, done at speed
    reduced, they are used for the movements of the bolts at the beginning of each zone.

TURNS : represents the total number of turns that make up the zone. The length of the zone depends on
    this value.
    The entered value must be greater than or equal to the sum of the acceleration turns,
    slowdown and change. Values from 1 to 999 are allowed.
   
   
EXAMPLE

turns change = 2
   
    turns acceleration = 3
    deceleration turns = 1
the total turns of the zone must be at least 2 + 3 + 1 = 6.
   

WIDTH. : Sock width. It is entered directly in centimeters or inches depending on the

    article in which we are working.

TO THE. THE A: relationship value between elastic feeder speed and cylinder speed; such
    value is expressed as a percentage.
    Example: programming a value of 452 means that the feeder will rotate at a speed equal to
    4.52 times the speed of the cylinder.

SAG. : By entering (with the space bar) an asterisk in this field, it is possible to specify the
    characteristics of sagomaduras (reductions).
    The passage to the programming window of the sagomaduras (reductions) is carried out in the
    as follows:
    - enter the asterisk in the SAG field;
- press the Return key.
   
    The sagomaduras (reductions) programming window has eight fields, such as
    It is illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.6b.

CF : configuration number (automatically updated by EDITOR). Up to 9 are allowed

settings for zone (and therefore no more than 9 "reduced" sagomized deals)
   
    The introduction of settings is done with the F4 key while canceling a
    configuration is done with F5.

TURNS : represents the number of spins of a sagomature deal (reduction)

Values from 1 to 99 are allowed.
   
    It should be noted that the sum of the turns programmed in this field is used to
    update the TURNS field of the WIDTH / LENGTH programming box. This appears
    leaving the programming window of the sagomaduras (reductions).

INI WIDTH. : initial width of the sagomate treatment (reduced). It is automatically programmed by the
 
    editor. 

END WIDTH : final width of the sagomado (reduced) treatment.

3-108

NOTE: Introducing the first configuration, the fields INI WIDTH and END WIDTH contain the value
  previously programmed in the CF field. Each new configuration entered is identical to the
previous. The value of the END WIDTH field can then be modified while it is not possible to alter
 
  the value of the INI WIDTH field. Obviously, the final width of a sagomadura (reduction) must
  coincide with the initial width of the sagomature (reduction) that immediately follows it.
  Wanting to modify it, it is enough to return to the previous configuration and modify the END WIDTH.
  The following INI WIDTH is also automatically updated.
Sagomaduras (reductions) are of three types:
 
  right deals when START WIDTH is equal to END WIDTH;
  reductions when START WIDTH is equal to END WIDTH;
  elongations when INI ANGHO is less than END WIDTH.

INI SPEED : Sagomate Deal Initial Speed (Reduced)

END SPEED : Final speed of the sagomado deal (reduced).

NOTE: The speeds entered in this table will be made by the machine only if in the
  table of speeds, the values entered for the reduced sagomated zone) are set
  equal to zero.  

ELASTIC INI : Initial speed of the elastic feeder in the sagomado (reduced) treatment.

ELASTIC END : Final speed of the elastic feeder in the sagomado (reduced) treatment.

The two values can be the same, typically in correspondence of a constant width treatment, or in any case different,
typically in correspondence of the reduction (or elongation) of the width.

In the case that all the values are null, the introduction of the first value, corresponding to the first initial width value,
determines a proportion that allows the values to be automatically programmed for all the other configurations.
The function key F9, active only in the first field of the ELASTICO INI column, allows in any case the automatic
updating of all the configurations in the case of modification of the value of the first configuration.

Example:

INI WIDTH END WIDTH ELASTIC INI ELASTIC END

22.0 23.0    
23.0 23.0
   
23.0 25.0    

programming the first initial elastic velocity value equal to 440, based on the proportion 22: 440 = Lx: Ex is obtained
for the different configurations:

INI WIDTH END WIDTH ELASTIC INI ELASTIC END

22.0 23.0 440 460
23.0 23.0 460 460
23.0 25.0 460 500

3-109

Each percentage value afterwards is modifiable independently, at the operator's care; There are, however, some
controls to ensure that the final value of one configuration is equal to the initial value of the next.

Modifying a width value determines the automatic update of the corresponding feeder speed value, in order to leave
the proportion between the two values unchanged.

Example:

INI WIDTH END WIDTH ELASTIC INI ELASTIC END

22.0 23.0 440 460

programming a final width value equal to 24, based on the proportion 23: 460 = 24: x, we obtain

INI WIDTH END WIDTH ELASTIC INI ELASTIC END

       
22.0 24.0 440   480
     

INI RING : Position (1 ÷ 16) of the plate ring at the beginning of the sagomado (reduced) treatment.
 

END RING : Position of the plate ring at the end of the sagomate treatment (reduced)
           
Active keys
F1 : takes you to the MAIN MENU.
       
F2 or ESC : leads to the PROGRAMMING MENU.        
F4 : introduces a configuration (in sagomadura "reduction").    
F5 : cancels a setting (in sagomature "reduction").    

               

               

Figure 3.3.2.8.6a

3-110
 Figure 3.3.2.8.6b

3-111

3.3.2.8.7 Thread guide programming

In the screen of figure 3.3.2.8.7 it is possible to enter up to a maximum of 99 settings for changing the thread guide.

Let's see the meaning of the different fields.

CF : Configuration number (field inaccessible to the user).

    The introduction of the settings appears with the F4 key.
    Cancellation is done with the F5 key.

ZONE : Conventional number of the zone. Entering this field a window opens in which you are
    indicated the name of the zone.  

TURNS : Number of turns relative to the previous configuration. For the first configuration of each
    zone is the absolute turn.  

POSI ANGU. : It has the same meaning and they are the same controls of the “Typologies” (Figure 3.3.2.8.1m and
    relative description to paragraph 3.3.2.8.1).

FOOD : For each thread guide "*" means "at work"

"." means "out of work"
     
    With the space bar it is possible to switch the different fields.
    It is possible to program only the yarn guides that have been enabled in the yarn map; low
    the description <FEED> is present in a non-accessible field that displays which
    are the thread guides enabled.  

LOOP INIC : In the case of repetitions of one or more thread guide settings (loop), the value
 
    you are going to program in this field is the one of the initial configuration of the loop.

LOOP NREP : Indicates the number of repetitions of the loop.

COMMANDS : The possibility of programming some outputs (drum commands) in this box is foreseen
DRUM   instead of in the table of typologies (such commands are the clamps, the
    the elastics and the blow of the knife).
   
Active keys :
F1 : Go back to the main menu
 

F2 or ESC : Returns to the programming menu

F3 : Scroll half a page back

F4 : Enter a configuration
 

F5 : Cancel a setup
 

F6 : Scroll half a page forward

F7 : Displays the name of the yarn associated with the yarn guide; in the DRUM COMMANDS field
displays the associated message.

3-112

Figure 3.3.2.8.7

3.3.2.8.8 Association Drawings

This procedure is used to select the different patterns to be made by the machine and their position in the sock.
The programming table, illustrated in figure 3.3.2.8.8, presents different fields, which mean the following:

NR : Progressive number of start / stop settings (not accessible).

- To enter a configuration, press the F4 key.
 
  - To cancel a configuration, press the F5 key.
DRAWING NAME : Name of the drawing to be made; there are two possibilities:
  a) manually enter the name of the drawing;
b) press F10: a list of the drawings present in the memory of the
 
  machine; by pressing "Return" in the desired drawing this is entered
  automatically in the box.

ENABLE WIRE GUIDE : By entering the asterisk "*" with the space bar, the execution of
the thread guides associated with the drawing through the Personal Graphic System
 
  Computer. Instead, by introducing, the period "." such management is disabled,
  thus allowing the normal management of the thread guides through programming
  made by Terminal Video.

START ZONE , ZONE STOP: Name of the area in which you want to start or end the drawing.
  You cannot enter the name manually, but you must press the
  key F10 to obtain the list of the zones of which the
  Article; By pressing "Return" in the desired zone, the latter is entered in the
  picture.

GIRO START , GIRO STOP : Turn of which you want to start or end the drawing.

RIPET. 1 ^ TURN : Number of times that you want to repeat the first drawing turn.
  If the first turn of the drawing has been described as "background", by the graphic editor (IBM),
varying the number of repetitions is equivalent to delaying the departure of the drawing,
 
  thus facilitating the positioning of the same drawing in the different sizes.

3-113

Keys enabled :

F1 : Return to the main menu.

F2 or ESC : Returns to the programming menu.

F4 : Enter a setting.

F5 : Cancel a setting.

F10 : Make the list of drawings and areas.

At the end of the procedure (by pressing the F1, F2 or ESC keys), some controls are carried out on the programmed
data and eventually, the following error messages are issued:

MISSING NAME DRAWING ⇒ No name has been entered in the "drawing name" field.

SEQUENCE ERROR ⇒ The starts and stops are not set in sequential mode, but, for
For example, there are two overlapping patterns, or the stop is positioned
   
    before start.

GIRO START / STOP ERROR ⇒ The start or stop turn entered is greater than the width of the zone.

NOTE: The different messages also indicate the number of the configuration in which it has been
  noted the error.  

        
 Figure 3.3.2.8.8

3-114

3.3.2.9 Editing Drawings

This procedure allows you to create or modify drawings directly on the terminal connected to the machine.

From the first level menu you enter the Editing drawing low menu, which renders the following three options available:

1 - Original drawing
2 - Drawing modification
3 - Drawing collected from existing

In the treatment of the first point, that is the creation of an original drawing, we will explain in detail all the different
modes of Editing and the commands, which in any case will also be valid for drawings edited by means of the other
two procedures: "Modification drawing ”and“ Drawing collected from existing ”. Of the latter, we will only give the
information necessary to start the editing section, since, at least in part, these are the same as those of the first
procedure.

1 - ORIGINAL DRAWING

It is requested to program the following data regarding the drawing to be created:

- Name ________ (max 8 characters)

- No. of needles ___ (of the machine in which the drawing will actually “rotate”)
- I comment ____________________ (max 20 characters)

In the event that the operator tries to enter the name of an existing drawing, the terminal emits a "beep" and the
output of the <name> field is not allowed.

We then have two possible procedures to choose from:

- Editing ribbed
- Editing Drawing

RIBBED EDITING

The dimensions of the drawing must be defined, programming them by means of the numeric keys:

- No. of needles ___

- N ° Turns ___

This number of needles is not necessarily the same as the one previously programmed in the machine, on the
contrary, it may be convenient to program a low multiple of the latter: the edited groove selection for a small portion
will be automatically propagated for the entire number of needles on the machine.

NB The maximum number of spins allowed depends on the number of needles so that the product between the two
numbers cannot exceed 36000.
After this a work window is presented, in which each column represents a needle and each line represents a turn. A
high status line indicates the current editing modes (we will talk later in the details).

3-115

The following keys are active for editing:

< Q > = in the video the symbol < X > is generated : needle that catches ”background thread (1 ^ feeding) and elastic
(2 ^ feeding) "
   
< R > = in the video the <symbol is generated . >: that takes only "background thread (1 ^ feed) "

By default in a new drawing all points are without elastic, so the video will contain all <symbols . >.

The following cursor control commands are also active :

< Arrow Keys > = for cursor movement in all four directions. < F4 > =
Move cursor 1/2 frame to the left.
< F5 > = 1/2 frame cursor movement to the right. < F3 > =
1/2 frame cursor move up. < F6 > = Move the cursor 1/2
frame down
< F7 > = Cursor movement at the beginning of the drawing (1st turn, 1st needle)
< F8 > = Cursor movement at the end of the drawing (last turn, last needle).
< F2 > = Move cursor to the beginning of the same line in which it is located.

Other commands are available, which can be activated by means of the following listed keys, which allow modifying
the current editing modes:

< X > = Selection of slow / fast movement of the cursor: the current mode is displayed on the status line in the upper
part (SLOW / FAST). In SLOW mode the cursor is moved with the arrow keys one character at a time, while in FAST
mode it is moved by the number of characters programmed in advance with the appropriate procedure accessible
through the <F9> key, described later. (By default there are 5 lines for vertical movement and 15 columns for
horizontal movement). The default speed is SLOW.

< I >, < M >, < J >, < K > = Editing direction selection: allow to choose the direction in which new edited characters will
be placed with respect to the cursor position. And its meaning is as follows:

< I > = up < M > =

down < J > = left < K >
= right

The current address is displayed on the status line at the top through the characters ^ , v , < , > , respectively.

NB It is possible to edit more than one character at the same time in the programmed address; for example, if you
want to edit ten "X" symbols to the right from the cursor position, you should:
- program right editing direction by means of the < K > key
- mark < 1 >, < 0 >, followed by < Q >
The cursor will stay in the same position and 10 ”X” will appear to the right.

NOTE: if there was an error when programming the value of automatic repetitions of the symbol that we want to edit,
  press the < ESC > key before the same symbol: this will cancel the number of repetitions
allowing us to re-program the correct one, followed by the desired symbol.
 3-116

< Spacebar > = Intro / Overlay mode selection: The current mode is displayed on the status line at the top (SOV / INS).
In SOB (overlay) mode the existing characters are replaced by new characters edited in the same position, while in
INS (input) mode they move in the direction in which they are being edited. The default mode is overlay.

NB, it seems appropriate to remember the need to be particularly attentive to the current mode of writing
(introduction or superimposition); It can easily happen to press the <space bar> by mistake, thus entering, for
example, the input mode, then edit the symbols believing to superimpose those that already exist, while instead they
will be introduced: in such a way, eventual symbols that move them out of the maximum dimension of the drawing
will be lost.

Two other functions for cursor control can be accessed with the < F9 > key that opens a menu high up in the video.
The two options are:

SEARCH COORDINATES = If you must program the coordinate where you want to move the cursor by means of the
rotation number and the needle: if the dimensions of the drawing and the desired coordinate allow it, the cursor will
be positioned in each case at the point at the top of the left of the screen.
NB In the status line at the top, the current coordinate of the cursor position is always displayed, expressed in rotation
and needle ( G = nnn; A = nnn).

FAST CURSOR MOVEMENT = We had assigned this function before, speaking of the SLOW / FAST mode of cursor
movement. It allows programming the number of characters of which the cursor must move at each movement when
in FAST mode . A question appears for the number of lines for vertical movement and the number of columns for
horizontal movement.

Let's now see the possible cancellation commands:

<n> < C > = cancels <n> symbols in the current direction (programmed by means of the <J>, <K>, <L> or <M> keys)
with respect to the cursor position.
In consequence of the cancellation, the symbols that remained in the direction of the canceled ones are regrouped
towards the cursor, while symbols equal to the one that was in correspondence of the same margin before the
cancellation are introduced in the margin.

<n> < Y > = cancel n. lines above or below the cursor if the current direction is UP or DOWN respectively. If instead the
programmed direction is RIGHT or LEFT it has the effect of canceling n. columns respectively to the right or left with
respect to the cursor position.
Also in this case the lines or columns beyond the canceled ones will be grouped towards the cursor while the lines
entered or columns equal to the last one that was defined before the cancellation will come to the margin.

More "drastic" cancellations, for which the Editor will ask for a new confirmation, are carried out using the following
keys:

< U > = Total Cancel : Cancel the entire drawing, compressed ribbing.
< V > = Partial Cancel : Cancel the entire drawing, exclusive grooving .

3-117

EDITING OPERATIONS IN A DEFINED AREA

The open menu of the function key < F9 > presents two options regarding the definition of a drawing area through
which useful operations can be performed. The two voices are: " select area " and " remove area ".

SELECT AREA - Allows the user to define an area of the desired dimension and position that will then be used to
develop certain operations which we will talk about later. Selecting this option, a new menu opens that makes two
different methods available for defining the area:

1) by means of cursor: the cursor must be positioned by means of the arrow keys on the first vertex
and press <CR>: a beep signal from the terminal will confirm that the data has been memorized. Repeat the
operation positioning with the cursor on the other vertex (the opposite to the first) of the area you wish to
define and pressing <CR> again: the terminal will emit another "beep", while the selected area will be
highlighted with respect to the rest of the screen. through lines bajolineadura . It is noteworthy that you can
continue to edit in the selected area exactly as in the rest of the video.
NB, in order to show the area terminal, it is necessary to send control characters that will "darken" the
characters to the right and left of the selected area, which will still be editable.

2) by means of coordinates: selecting this option will open a small form in the lower part where the coordinates
of two opposite vertices of the area to be selected must be programmed using the numeric keys, expressed in
the first turn, first needle and last turn, last needle .
After having programmed the desired values (pressing the <CR> key each time), an area with the same
modalities described above will be highlighted.

REMOVE AREA - this option allows “deactivating” the selected area with the previous functions, from which the low-
line lines that distinguish it will disappear.
If this option is chosen when there is no selected area, a “beep” will be emitted to signal the terminal.

As we said before, it is possible, once an area is selected in the video, some operations appear with it that, if used
wisely, can simplify the editing of the drawing. Let's see them one by one:

< N >, < D >: DOUBLE <N> TIMES AREA - The information contained in the already selected area is copied <n> times
from the current cursor position to the programmed address.
By means of the number keys you can program the number of duplications of the desired area before dialing the < D >
key , which only has the effect of copying the area once . The first duplication will always come anyway considering
the cursor as the vertex in the upper left part of the copied area; the successive ones, if they are, will be placed next to
the first copy in the current address programmed by means of the J, K, I, M keys.

< N >, < S >: REFLECT <N> TIMES AREA - the information contained in the already selected area is copied <n> times in
mirror mode from the current cursor position to the programmed direction.
The function is very similar to that of duplication already seen, but the image contained in the selected area is
reflected according to the vertical axis if the current direction is right or left , or according to the horizontal axis if we
have programmed the high or low direction . Also for this function, the desired number of copies must be
programmed (if different than one) before < S >.
The first mirror copy will always be made considering the cursor as the vertex in the upper left part of the copied area,
the other possible copies requested will be close to the first one in the current direction.

3-118

< N >, < H >: SHIFT OF <N> NEEDLES / TURNS AREA: the information circled in the defined area supports a rotation of
<n> needles or turns according to the current direction.
This procedure works only on the information contained in the selected area. By means of the numeric keys the
desired "shift" number <n> will be programmed, after this the <H> key is marked: The image inside the area will be like
this "rotated" of <n> needles if the programmed direction it is right or left or <n> turns if the direction is high or low .
We make an example to better clarify the effect of this operation. We admit having selected an area that contains the
following image:

XXXXXXXXXX
 . XXXXXXXX.
. . XXXXXX. .
. . . XXXX. . .
. . . . XX. . . .

If we want to rotate it 5 needles to the right and mark the <5> key on the keyboard, followed by the <H> key, after
having programmed the right current direction by means of the <K> key: the image will be like this :

XXXXXXXXXX
XXXX . . XXXX
XXX. . . . XXX
XX. . . . . . XX X.
.......X

Similarly, rotations in the vertical sense can be made by programming the high or low direction .

< N >, < B >: SPREAD <N> TIMES AREA: the defined area is spread out in all four directions from the current cursor
position.
After having programmed the desired number of propagations with the numeric keys, mark the <B> key: the selected
area will be reduced once based on the current position of the cursor, considering the latter as the top vertex to the
left of the copied area Then, if <N> is greater than 1, it will be propagated in all four directions <N> times.

NB - In reference to operations in a defined area described above, it is very important to remember the following
points:

1) Always keep in mind the current Editing mode: Introduction or overlay. If we are in the introduction mode, the
video information will be transferred to make the new ones, irretrievably losing the characters that are moved
outside the maximum dimensions of the drawing.

2) As we have already mentioned, the information of the defined area is always modifiable, so it is necessary to
be attentive to a propagation, a duplication, etc., do not extend until it alters the information of the same area: if
that happens obviously the successive copies of the area will be equal to that of the error.

3) A very important point! Ribbing and drawing are not actually completely separate entities: that means that a
procedure in a defined area will operate on both the ribbing and the drawing .
For example, admitting that you are editing the drawing and propagating a selected area, the same underside
groove area will also be propagated as the one in the drawing .

3-119

WINDOW DRAWN ON THE RIBBON

When the groove is being edited it is possible to open the drawn "windows" so that the drawings can be viewed and
edited in relation to the groove itself.
The function key <F9> open menu makes available the operant options in the drawn windows:

RIBBED EDIT / DRAWING WINDOW - This option, selectable only if at the beginning of the section we are in the
Ribbed Editing, opens a small menu with the RIBBED and DRAWING voices . If while we are editing the groove, we
choose the option, DRAWING, we will enter the Editing drawn window.
The display will be sent in "reverse" ; the grooving information will remain visible, but it cannot be modified by means
of the <Q> and <R> keys (we repeat that this will be done by the operations in the defined area!); if previously, but in
the same Editing section , drawing-windows have been defined, these will be immediately visualized (the windows are
distinguished because, unlike the rest of the screen, they are not in “reverse”).

Editing is active in only one window in the video at any time. If you want to render active another window already
open, or open a new one (rendering it automatically active!) It is necessary to select the option SELECT DRAWING
WINDOW from the Edit menu (same key <F9>).
After having chosen this procedure, a small menu will open with the following two voices:

NEW WINDOW - choose this option if you want to open a new drawing-window for editing in the video . Then you
must choose whether to define the new window by means of the cursor or by means of coordinates (exactly as we
have already seen for the definition of an area).
REMEMBER: in the case of defining the window-drawing using the cursor, until I was marking the two vertices will
only work keys move the cursor, while others will be inhibited; therefore seems that the program is blocked , most
likely you are just waiting for the <CR> key to mark a vertex.
Another important point : overlapping two drawing windows is not allowed. If, for example, they try to mark a vertex
inside an existing window, it will not be accepted (the terminal will not emit the usual "beep"). But let's admit to
marking the second vertex of the area outside the other drawing-windows, in such a way that the resulting window
overlaps another one already present: what happens in this case? Well, you will hear the second "beep" as if the data
were accepted status, but in reality the window will not come open: you must mark the two vetices again in the
correct way, that is, not to generate overlapping windows.

NOTE: also to "show" the drawn windows, as for the area seen previously, it is
  It is necessary to send the control characters to the terminal that will "darken" the characters to the left and
right of the window: in this case however, such characters are not editable , since
 
belong to the ribbed underbody.
 

EXISTING WINDOW - This option allows the Editing to be rendered active in a different window than the one being
worked on, but already existing in the video, admitted that there is more than one. After having selected the voice, the
cursor should be moved inside the window that you want to render active and press <CR>: a "beep" from the terminal
will confirm that the information has been accepted.
NB Also in this case, until <CR> has been given inside a window, many editing keys will remain inactive: we are
verifying that it may be easier than you think to get confused and think that the program has crashed!

NOTE: It is possible to define an “area” only inside the “active” window at the moment.

3-120

The active window can be modified in the dimensions and in the position through another voice of the activated menu
of <F9>:
DRAWING WINDOW MODIFICATION - after having chosen this option, you are asked whether to define the new
dimensions of the window through the cursor or the numeric coordinates. The procedure is identical to the one
already seen in the details for defining an area: the vertices will be marked by means of the cursor in the first case or
the coordinates will be prepared (first turn, first needle and last turn, last needle) . In the second case. The window will
be modified as a request, remaining active anyway.
Inside the active window all the Editing commands already seen are available, except the <Q> key to edit Ribbed
characters (take elastic). Also operations in a defined area work as for Ribbing. Everything is circumscribed to the
limits of the window itself, so a propagation, for example, will never extend to the existing drawing outside the
window (which is not visible).

Being possible to draw up to 3 feeds, plus the background thread, 4 keys are available for Editing, which generate
other symbols, of the drawing:

< R > = in the video the symbol <is generated . >: background thread
< W > = in the video the symbol < $ > is generated : drawing wire on the 2nd power supply (optional, as an alternative to
    elastic, it sponges).
< P > = at video is generated the symbol < # >: thread drawn in the 3rd feed.
< O > = at video is generated the symbol < * >: wire drawn in the 4th feed.
Naturally, to each point in the video, defined by a needle and a turn, a single symbol can be associated.

To exit the Editing of the drawing window, it is enough to choose the EDIT RIBBED / DRAWING option from the menu
associated with the same <F9> key, and still the word RIBBED from the open menu of this option.

EDITING DRAWING

So far we had talked about Editing Ribbed and window drawing. As we said at the beginning, however, it is possible to
enter directly into Editing of the drawing, regardless of the Grooving.
If the groove for the drawing, the screen has not been previously defined, it is considered by default any bottom
without elastic (symbol <.>).

Entering in Editing drawing the screen does not go in "reverse" because it is as if a large drawable window had been
defined as the whole drawing.
This allows to have a general representation of the drawing considering the transparent grooving, and to make any
modification to an existing drawing.

3-121

SAVING THE FILE AT THE EXIT OF THE EDITING SECTION

In the Editing menu (associated with the <F9> key) there is an option that allows you to finish the Editing of a drawing:
EDITING SECTION EXIT .
After having selected this item, a menu with three options opens that allows you to choose the methods for storing
the drawing data in memory.

AUTOMATIC COMPRESSION - Each turn is confronted with the previous one and when two are equal, compression
appears, that is, only the information of one turn and the number of repetitions is memorized: this procedure saves on
occupied memory. However, it is necessary to pay attention to an important particular: with this method, if you want
the last drawing turn to come repeated to infinity, it is necessary to describe it at least twice, otherwise the last
drawing block found will be repeated to infinity.

INFINITE REPETITION FIRST N TURNS - By selecting this voice, it will be asked how many turns of the drawing, from
the first one, must be repeated throughout the sock.

INFINITE REPEAT LAST N TURNS - With this mode, the drawing turns present before the “N” turn programmed by the
operator will be memorized with the same automatic compression modes, while the last “N” turns will be repeated
infinitely. This last modality can be very useful in the case that you want to infinitely repeat a bottom area, for example
the last 2 bottom turns, in order to increase the turns of the carving without modifying the pattern.

If the memory of the machine is already full, an error message appears and asks if you want to leave the editing
section anyway. If so, the work done in this section is lost. If not, the operator can cancel any object in memory by
means of keyboard procedure No. 110 and, successively, can repeat the procedure for saving the file.
INFORMATION ON THE SCREEN

A "status line" raised on the screen provides at all times the main information regarding the current modes of Editing.
From left to right we will have:

- F10 = HELP : Indication of the function key that opens the help menu. (see next
paragraph for Help functions).

- F9 = EDIT : indication of the function key that opens the editing menu.

- G = ___ : vertical (rotation) coordinate of the current cursor position.

- A = ___ : horizontal (needle) coordinate of the current cursor position.

- >, <, ^, v : one of the four symbols that indicates the current direction of editing (respectively right, left, high and
low).

- SLOW, FAST : current mode indication of cursor movement speed: slow and fast.

- INS, SOV : current editing mode: introduction or superimposition.

- AREA = ___.___ : coordinates (needle turn) of the top vertex to the left of the eventual area defined on the screen.

- DX = ___ : vertical dimension (in turns) of the area defined on the screen.

- DY = ___ : horizontal dimension (in needles) of the area defined on the screen.

3-122

HELP FUNCTIONS

The function key <F10> opens the Help menu that contains the three options that we illustrate in the following details:

1) COMMANDS LIST - by selecting this item from the menu, a list of commands will appear in the center of the
screen. Given their length, only half of them can be viewed at a time. To see the second half mark the function
letter <F6>, then to return to the first half mark <F3>, and so on.
If you want to, it is possible to browse the commands one by one, also by means of the UP and DOWN arrow
keys, but their slowness is not advisable to use.
The complete list of the commands displayed by Help is as follows:

F10 = HELP
F9 = EDIT
F8 = END DRAWING
F7 = START DRAWING
F6 = HALF PAGE DOWN
F5 = HALF PAGE RIGHT
F4 = HALF PAGE LEFT
F3 = HALF PAGE UP
F2 = START LINE
ESC = ACERA REPEATS
"I" = SELECT UP (^)
"J" = SELECT LEFT (<)
"K" = SELECT RIGHT (>)
"M" = SELECT DOWN (v)
"X" = SELECT SLOW / FAST
SPACE = SELECT INS / SOV
<N> "R" = <N>. (1 ^ SELECTOR)
<N> "Q" = <N> X (2 ^ SELECTOR)
<N> "P" = <N> # (3 ^ SELECTOR)
<N> "O" = <N> * (4 ^ SELECTOR)
<N> "T" = <N> + (5 ^ SELECTOR)
<N> ”W” = <N> $ (2 ^ SELECTOR)
<N> "C" = CANCEL <N> SYMBOLS
 <N> "Y" = CANCEL <N> LINES / COL.
"V" = CANC. TOT. EXCLUSIVE RIBBED
"OR" = TOTAL CANCELLATION
<N> "D" = DOUBLE <N> TIMES AREA
<N> "S" = REFLECT <N> TIMES AREA
<N> "H" = <N> NEEDLE / TURN SHIFT
"L" = RULE DISPLAY
<N> "B" = SPREAD <N> TIMES AREA

Among the listed commands you may notice that the <L> key displays the ruler . In practice, it is a simple
graphic representation that appears on the left side and the bottom part of the screen: in this, turns (vertically)
and needles (on the horizontal side at the bottom) of the screen are reported. area of the drawing found in the
video.
While the ruler is displayed, another press of the <L> key or any other key will make it disappear.

2) SYMBOLS - this is the second option in the Help menu: selecting it, a small window appears in the center of
the screen where the keys associated with each symbol in the drawing are indicated:

.=R $=W #=P

*=O +=T X=Q

To exit, as usual, use the <ESC> key.

3) DRAWING DATA - choosing this item from the Help menu will open a central window where the data of the
drawing being edited is reported: the name, the eventual comment entered when creating the drawing, the
dimensions in turns and needles and in The end is the section that we have open is for editing ribbed or editing
drawing.

3-123

2 - MODIFICATION

Entering this procedure, the name of the drawing to be modified is asked. It is possible, beyond just typing the name
of the drawing directly, to be able to recall the list of available drawings by means of the <F10> function key. In this
case, we must bring the line in "reverse" in the name of the desired drawing by means of the arrow keys and mark
<CR>: this name will automatically be transferred in the appropriate field; After a new confirmation <CR>, you will be
able to access the modification of the drawing.
In the event that the operator tries to enter the name of a drawing that does not exist, the terminal emits a "beep" and
the output of the <name> field is not allowed.

NOTE: It is not possible to modify drawings, created in the Graphic System, that have “threads” different from those of
“standard” or that do not contain thread guide data.

COMPATIBILITY BETWEEN DRAWINGS CREATED ON "SPORT TA", "MONO 4 VERSION 0035" AND "MONO 4 VERSION
0040 - 0045 - 0050 (CURRENT)" MACHINES USING GRAPHIC SYSTEMS 4.0 AND 4.1

With the graphical system 4.1, the programming of the “drawing thread guide” in graphical environment has been
introduced; This novelty does not present any compatibility problem between the drawings created on "SPORT TA",
"MONO 4 version 0035" and "MONO 4 versions 0040 - 0045 - 0050 (current)" machines, although it is necessary to
bear in mind the following points:

. The data related to the “drawing thread guide” are only made on the “MONO 4 versions 0040 - 0045 - 0050 (current)”
machine.

. In the event that drawings with “drawing thread guide” data are sent to “SPORT TA” and “MONO 4 version 0035”
machines, such associated data, if not made, will be lost in the event of subsequent transmission of the same
drawings of the machine to a Floppy Disk (UFD) or to another machine; the selection of needles, on the other hand,
will be correct.

NOTE: Because the data related to the "drawing thread guide" occupies space in the memory of the machine, if the
interested drawings are used only in the "SPORT TA" and "MONO 4 version 0035" machine, it is advisable
not to carry out any programming of the same "drawing thread guide" in a graphic environment.

. Drawings containing data related to “drawing thread guides” cannot be viewed through the Drawing Editor on the
video terminal.
3 - DRAWING COLLECTED FROM EXISTING

By choosing this option, the name of the original drawing is asked, that is, of the original from which to obtain a copy.
Here also, as for the Drawing Modification, the name can be programmed either directly or through the list of the
drawings present displayed by means of the <F10> key.
After having programmed the name of the emerging drawing, the name of the collected drawing is asked, which
naturally must be entered in its entirety.
A description field is also provided as in the case of Editing Original Drawing.
If the operator tries to enter as "original drawing" the name of a drawing that does not exist, or as "collected drawing"
the name of an existing drawing, the terminal emits a "beep" and the output of the <name field is not allowed >.

3.3.2.10 Editor Exit

This operation allows you to leave the EDITOR.

An important clarification is necessary. The data that the user enters through the EDITOR are safely stored in the
machine's reserve memory, and not only when the program is exited. This feature is useful in critical situations
(errors, decompositions, improvised lack of power) because it prevents all work done from being lost.

3-124

3.3.3 Description and Regulation of the Electronic Part

Referring to figure 3.3.3, which schematically illustrates the internal part of the electrical cabinet, the following are indicated:

- The stabilized power supply (1), with a reserve battery, described in paragraph 3.3.3.1.
- The CPU card (2), described in paragraph 3.3.3.2.
- The INTERFACE card (3), described in paragraph 3.3.3.3.
- The CONSOLLE card (4), described in paragraph 3.3.3.4.
- The SELECCION IPB-48 card (5), described in paragraph 3.3.3.5.
- The P / P motor module (6), described in paragraph 3.3.3.6.
- The "SPI-16/13" module (7), described in paragraph 3.3.3.7.
- The drive for the Brush-Less motor (8), described in paragraph 3.3.3.8.

NOTE: - The parts drawn, in the figure, are located at the rear of the electrical cabinet.

- The (ISM) card (RS 422 interface for connection to the “LWS” monitoring system) is present only if
requested.
 Figure 3.3.3

3-125

3.3.3.1 Stabilized Power Supply with Backup Battery

From an input voltage of 18 Vac - 3f, it generates the following voltages:

∙ 24 Vdc, not stabilized, for all electromechanical devices: solenoid valves, passo-passo motors and
electromagnets for selecting the needles.

∙ 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc, for the operation of all electronic cards. The two voltages are stabilized with “Switching”
mode .

In the event of a lack of the three-phase input voltage, the immediate introduction of the 24 Vdc reserve battery is
verified. In such conditions, it keeps all the electronic parts active for a few hours, that is, until the battery remains
charged, or for the programmed time, for safety, with function n. 175 (described in paragraph 3.3.1); It also keeps all
the electromechanical devices active until the cylinder stops, thus allowing it to start again, when the line voltage
returns, without losing the position of the cycle, and without creating the elimination of the sock.
With the same function 175, it is also possible to program a time during which the eventual intervention of the backup
battery is ignored, to avoid interrupting the machine in the event of power holes of a few tens of mSec.

The feeder is protected from:

∙ overvoltage;
∙ low voltage;
∙ overcurrent and short circuit.

3.3.3.2 CPU board

It is the "smart" card that controls, by means of a µProcessor of type 68000, the entire electronic unit.

It contains the following functional blocks:

- µProcessor 68000 and related service circuits.

- Bank of 1024 Kbytes of Flash memory, which contains the application program; Flash memories are
programmable (and reprogrammable) directly on the card, loading from the RS 232 serial line, through UFD, the
data supplied by MATEC in a suitable Floppy Disk.

- Bank of 128 Kbytes of EPROM (2 chips 27512), which contains the configuration data of the LCA devices and the
software for loading the data, the serial interface, and the programming of the Flash memories.

- Bank of 256 Kbytes of RAM, for the execution of the application programs.

- Bank of 256 Kbytes of RAM, with power in reserve, by means of a lithium battery: it contains the data of the
articles and of the sizes to be made in the machine.

- RTC (Real Time Clock): contains the current date and time and generates the reference synchronism (TIC) of the
operating system: 1 TIC = 1/1024 sec.

- Synchronous interface for peripheral devices.

- Asynchronous interface , I / O channel, for possible optional peripheral cards.

The card is provided with 3 connection points (ponticello):

- WDOG : to always position in the ON position.

- BATT : to turn ON when the card is working.

it is advisable to set it to OFF if the card is inactive for a long period (for example, as a reserve card).

NOTE: In the OFF position, all the data contained in the RAM memory, with the date and time of the RTC device, are
lost.
 3-126

- RESET : placed on the green LED “RUN”, if it closes even momentarily, it causes the general reset
of the system; to use with great caution .

The CPU card has 3 signaling LEDs:

- "RUN" LED (green): indicates the normal operation of the card and the execution of the software.

- "FAIL" LED (red): indicates the presence of difficulty in executing the software.

- "HALT" LED (red): indicates that the card is in a HALT or RESET condition, probably caused by one of the following
reasons:

. Intervention of the Watch Dog circuit;

. Abnormal condition signaled by the µProcessor, for example, BUS ERROR;
. Hardware decomposition;
. BUG software not yet identified and correct.

NOTE: Replacement cards, supplied by MATEC, do not have the following devices

. EPROM memories
 
. RAM memories.
 

Such devices must be recovered by the replaced card, in the care of the user.

Furthermore, the BATT connection point is in the OFF position.

The user will also be in charge of the loading of the data (articles and files) in RAM and the
programming of the Flash memories with the data of the application provided in the appropriate Floppy
Disk.

3.3.3.3 INTERFACE card

It develops different interphase functions towards the electromechanical devices of the machines and towards the
power devices internal to the electrical cabinet, more precisely:
It consists of a base card and an Input expansion card .

INPUTS

- 40 converters connected to the sensors and controls of the machine.

- 8 converters connected to 32 (max) electronic sensors to control the course of the spinning; the acquisition of
the status of the 32 sensors appears with multiplexing mode (8x4).
- 3 converters connected to the channels (CH1 - CH2 - ZERO). of the general synchronization encoder.

OUTPUTS

- 2 outputs with TRIAC for the command of 2 contactors powered at 24 Vac.

- 8 self-protected exits. To command direct current loads: 4 light bulbs and service relays.

- 1 opto-isolated output for the command, Start / Stop, of the brushless drive.
- 2 opto-isolated output for the command of the feeder operating mode.

SEVERAL

- 8 converters (mounted on the expansion card) connected to the 32 electronic sensors to control the course of
the spinning; the acquisition of the status of the 32 sensors appears in multiplexing mode (8 x 4).
- 3 converters connected to the channels (CH1 - CH2 - ZERO) of the general synchronization encoder.

3-127
MOTORIZATION

Brush-less

- Control of speed and position of the Brush-less motor , by means of the µcontroller LM628.
- 12-bit DAC, to generate the current reference to the drive that commands the brush-less motor ; the
reference assumes values between -10 and +10 Vdc, corresponding to the maximum current produced by the
drive: ± 20 Amp.

The adjustment of the R39 - R42 - R43 trimmers is carried out during the card test and must not be subsequently
modified.

Passo-passo

- Circuits for generating pass, direction and current level control signals, for a maximum of 6
pass-pass motors , which part of the power is still external to this card.

OTHER FEATURES

- Safety circuits, to prevent possible causes of engine leakage.

- Diagnostic circuits.
- Interface circuits to the console card.
- Interphase circuits to the serial load drivers that control the machine's solenoid valves.

CONNECTION POINTS (PONTICELLO)

- The available card of different connection points (Jumper) to position as follows:

Jumper P3 Q4 Q7 Q8 Q9 Q10 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6
Position 1-2 2-3 N N N N ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

3.3.3.4 CONSOLLE card

Interface directly with the uProcessor 68.000, of the CPU card, it performs the following functions:

- Keyboard management and recognition of the pressed key; consequent command of the LEDs associated with
the operating keys.

- Timing generation towards the local display and eventual remote display (optional).

- Management of the asynchronous serial interface RS232, up to 38,400 bit / sec.

- The card has an R27 trimmer to regulate the contrast on the display.

3.3.3.5 IPB-48 SELECTION card

The card is managed by a µProcessore 68HC11, placed below the master CPU, and capable of controlling, in the base
version, 4 Harting electromagnetic actuators, at 4 cams (levels).
With the union of an LCA module , which contains digital circuits, and suitable expansion modules , which contain
power drivers, it can control up to 5 Harting actuators at 6 and 8 levels.

Harting actuators (special for MATEC), commanded by this card, are characterized by a double coil for each
commanding cam. The feeding of a coil determines the downward switching of the corresponding cam; the supply of
the complementary coil determines the upward switching of the corresponding cam.

The power sequence of each coil is as follows:

- application of a voltage of 24 Vdc for 3.8 mSec, without current control: speed_uP.
- application of a current of 200 mAmp. For an additional 2.2 mSec : temporary holding current.
- current removal: the cam will retain its position by magnetic retention.

3-128

The drivers that feed the coils are of the intrinsic protection type , capable of supporting:

. overcurrent.
. short circuit.
. overtemperature.

Card regulations
. connection point ( jumper) in position P2 2-5.
. trimmer R6, regulated to obtain a holding current of 200 mAmp in the coils of the Harting actuator.

Fuses

The card has 4 fast fuses of 4 Amp, to protect the supply of the Harting actuator. The fuse only protects against 24
Vdc voltage short circuit to ground; the other protections are intrinsic to the drivers that command the coils.

3.3.3.6 P / P Motors Module

- It performs the physical command function of the 5 step-by-step motors mounted on the machine.
All motors are commanded in Half Step, obtained by positioning the appropriate connection points in position "H".

- The motor command current is as follows:

Engine 1 - Command of the mesh formation trucks .

. rotating motor: current = 1 Amp.

. motor stopped: current = 0.4 Amp.

Motor 2 - Platen ring command .

. rotating motor: current = 1.6 Amp.

. motor stopped: current = 0.9 Amp.

Motor 3 and 4 - Control of the elastic feeders .

. rotating motor: current = 1.6 Amp.

. motor stopped: current = 0.4 Amp.

Motor 5 - Control of the suction valve.

. rotating motor: current = 0.33 Amp.

. motor stopped: current = 0.2 Amp.

Fuses

The card has 5 fast 2 Amp fuses. to protection of the motor power supply. Each fuse protects only the 24 Vdc
voltage that supplies the motor drivers from short circuit.
Another 200 mAmp fuse protects the 12 Vdc voltage that feeds the zero sensors of the 1/2/5 motors .

Connection points (ponticello)

The card has 5 connection points ( jumpers) for selecting the H alf-step or F ull-step mode : position them all in H
( H alf-step).

3-129

3.3.3.7 SPI 16/13 module

- It performs the physical command function of all the machine's electrovalves, plus some reserve ones, for a total
of 104 commands.

- The command is carried out by means of synchronous serial load OTALI drivers (SPI), managed directly by
µProcessore 68.000, by means of hardware circuits implemented in the interface card.
- Drivers are protected against:
overcurrent - short circuit - overvoltage - overtemperature - And they also signal the open circuit.

- Every 20 msec a procedure is activated that confirms the command of all the drivers again. At the same time, the
status of all the outputs is acquired and the eventual intervention of a protection is signaled: this allows an always
active diagnosis in all the electropneumatic commands of the machine.
3.3.3.8 Drive for Motro Brush-Less

It is also called "converter" or "servicomando" ("drive" in English) and is of the trapezoidal type , characterized by the
signaling of the rotor position, by means of suitable 120 ° electrical out-of-phase Hall sensors.

The drive is powered by a three-phase voltage of 220 Vac and supplies the current requested by the motor, with a
maximum peak of 20 Amp.

The drive is controlled by a copy reference signal , of the value of ± 10 Volt, corresponding to ± 20 Amp supplied to the
motor; This signal is generated by the motor position control, present on the interface card .

Another signal, always generated by the interface card , represents the logical enable of the drive; more precisely:

∙ low level (0 ÷ 1.5 Vdc), which disables the drive;

∙ high level (> 10 Vdc), which enables the drive.

The operating status of the drive is indicated by the contract of a relay, that is:

∙ contact closed = correct operation;

∙ open contact = malfunction or intervention of one of the protections, that is:

- motor thermal;
- overcurrent;
- error in the signals of the Hall sensors;
- error in the engine's dynamic braking circuit;
- error in the power supply of the same drive.

The opening of the contact signals the intervention of a protection, already operated autonomously .

The successive action, carried out by the machine control unit, which commands the deceleration of the KA1
contactor , supplying the same drive, is carried out only for safety.

NOTE: In the event of replacement of the drive, the new one will already be fully calibrated and can therefore be
mounted without having to carry out new operations; In such a situation, it is advisable to consult the
specific instruction manual for the drive itself: however, having more suppliers, it is necessary to choose the
appropriate manual, among those included in the electrical part related to the technical documentation
package of the machine.

3-130

3.3.4 Electronic Devices Accessories

The configuration of the parameters, relative to the accessory electronic devices for the machine, are the following, in
paragraphs 3.3.4.1 and 3.3.4.2.

3.3.4.1 Video Terminal Configuration “FACIT 990”

The configuration of the video terminal can normally be carried out from the machine through function 101, operating
in the following mode:

♦ connect the video terminal to the RS232 connector of the machine;

♦ From the keyboard of the machine, select the function “ PRGM, 101, ENTR ”.
Select, using the arrows “ Å ” and “ Ç ”, the item “ TERMINAL CONFIGURATION ”, therefore, press “ ENTR ”; display:

' Terminal '

' Connected '
Thus, the machine sends a data packet to the video terminal that reconfigures it. Still, if some fundamental data (such
as communication data) have been varied in the video terminal, the machine may not be able to automatically
reconfigure the same video terminal. In this case, the video terminal can be reconfigured manually, by its internal
SET-UP .

NOTE: This procedure does not launch the Editor application.

The following procedure with the main configuration parameters, therefore it is not necessary to consult the specific
manual of the video terminal:

1) Turn on the video terminal.

2) Press, at the same time, the keys “ Ctrl ”, “ Alt ” and “ Esc ” on an “ AT ” type keyboard ; instead, press the " SHIFT ",
" ALT " and " SYSREQ " keys on an " ASCII " type keyboard .

NOTE: When asked to press more than one key at the same time, it is necessary to press and
  press and hold the first key in the sequence, so press and hold also
  the second key in the sequence, then press the third key, finally, leave them all again
together. The " SHIFT " key is indicated on the keyboard with the symbol " × "; the “ SYSREQ ” key is the
 
  alternative function of the “ PRT SC ” key.        

After having pressed all three keys, the following main menu will appear on the screen, which
 
  contains 9 voices:            

(one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ANSI ATTRIBUTE PROGRAM

PARAMETERS (parameters) OPTIONS (options)

     

SAVE PARAMETERS EXIT From Setup (without save)

     
RECALL PARAMETRS            
DEFAULT PARAMETERS            
CLEAR SCREEN            
CLEAR COMMUNICATION          

TERMINAL RESET
           
DEFAULT KEYS CODES            

Selecting one of the menu items, using the arrows “ Å “ “ Ç ”, the

undermenu with the relative parameters and the possible options.      

The voices interested Are the following: " COMMAND ", " GENERAL ", " DISPLAY ", " KEYBOARD ", " COM1 ",
" ATTRIBUTE " and " PROGRAM "; the remaining voices are not used in the program.

3-131

Next, the programming of the parameters concerned are reported to the " GENERAL " voice :

(one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ATTRIBUTE ANSI PROGRAM

PARAMETERS OPTIONS
           

PERSONALITY = TVI990 TVI990

           
ENHANCE MODE = ON       TVI955      
COMM MODE = FULL DUPLEX TVI950
         
MONITOR MODE = OFF       WY60 / 150/120    

AUTOWRAP = OFF       WY / 50 + / 50     

EDIT MODE = LINE       PCTERM      
FONT CHOICE = PERSONALITY     VT320 / 220      
SEND ACKNOWLEDGE = OFF VT100 / 52
         
RECEIVE CR = CR       SCO CONSOLE    
HOST PORT = COM1              
PRINTER PORT = PARALLEL            
PRINT MODE = NONE              
PRINT PAGE FLIP = OFF
             
PRINT DATA = 8              
AUTOPAGE FLIP = OFF
             

NOTE: Position the cursor on the desired parameter, using the arrows “ Ç ” and “ È ”, therefore, vary the type of option,
using the space bar. For a correct operation of the applications, in the video terminal, the programming of
 the parameters must necessarily be the same as the one shown.

Next, the programming of the parameters concerned are reported to the word " DISPLAY ":

(one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ATTRIBUTE ANSI PROGRAM

PARAMETERS OPTIONS
           

COLUMNS = 80 80
           
LINES = 24         132      

CLS COLUMNS CHANGE = OFF     Econ-80      

PAGE LENGHT = 1XLINES

NUMBER OF PAGE = 2
STATUS LINE ATTR. = NORMAL
TOP LINE = STATUS
BOTTOM LINE = NONE
CURSOR TYPE = BLINKING UNDLN
SCREEN SAVER = 10min
SCROLL SPEED = JUMP
REFRESH RATE = 80Hz
SCREEN BACKGROUND = DARK

NOTE: Position the cursor on the desired parameter, using the arrows “ Ç ” and “ È ”, therefore, vary the type of option,
using the space bar. For a correct operation of the applications, in the video terminal, the programming of
the parameters must necessarily be the same as the one shown

3-132

Next, the programming of the parameters interested in the “ KEYBOARD ” voice are reported :

(one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ATTRIBUTE ANSI PROGRAM

PARAMETERS OPTIONS
         

LANGUAGE = US US
             
KEY CLICK = ON         UK      

KEY REPEAT = ON FRENCH

         
CAPS LOCK + SHIFT = lwr case       GERMAN    

MARGIN BELL = OFF       SPANISH    

ENTER KEY = CR       FINNISH    

ENTER KEY (num pad) = CR       NORWAY    
DELETE = DELETE ITALIAN
         
BACKSPACE = BACKSPACE       DANISH    

BREAK KEY = 250ms       SWISS / GERMAN    

LEFT ALT KEY FUNCT (ASCII)       SWISS / FRENCH    
TRANSMIT KEYCODE = ASCII CODE     SWEDISH    
NAT 'REPLACEMENT CHARS = OFF FRENCH / CANADIAN
     
CAPS LOCK SAVE = NO              
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS = PERSONALITY            
SPEAKER VOLUME = WEAK
             

NOTE: Position the cursor on the desired parameter, using the arrows “ Ç ” and “ È ”, therefore, vary the type of option
using the space bar. For a correct operation of the applications, in the video terminal, the programming of
the parameters must necessarily be the same as the one shown.

Next, the programming of the parameters interested in the “ COM1 ” voice are reported :
 (one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ATTRIBUTE ANSI PROGRAM

PARAMETERS OPTIONS
         

DATA RATE = 9600 300

         
DATA BITS = 8 1200
           
STOP BIT = 1       2400      

PARITY = NONE       4800      

HAND SHAKE = XON / OFF     9600      

XMIT DELAY = NONE     19.2K      

PARITY CHECK = OFF 38.4K
         
EIGHT DATA BIT = PROCESS 57.6K
         

NOTE: Position the cursor on the desired parameter, using the arrows “ Ç ” and “ È ”, therefore, vary the type of option,
using the space bar. For a correct operation of the applications, in the video terminal, the programming of
the parameters must necessarily be the same as the one shown.

Next, the programming of the parameters interested in the “ ATTRIBUTE ” voice are reported :

(one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ATTRIBUTE ANSI PROGRAM

PARAMETERS OPTIONS
         

ATTRIBUTE = PAGE CHARACTER

         
955 ATTRIBUTE = SPACE       LINE    

WRITE PROCTET INTENSITY = DIM       PAGE    

+ REVERSE = OFF
             
  + UNDERLINE = OFF            
  + BLINKING = OFF            
+ BLANK = OFF
               

NOTE: Position the cursor on the desired parameter, using the arrows “ Ç ” and “ È ”, therefore, vary the type of option
using the space bar. For a correct operation of the applications, in the video terminal, the programming of
the parameters must necessarily be the same as the one shown.

3-133

Next, the programming of the parameters concerned are reported to the word “ PROGRAM ”:

WARNING: This procedure is used to reprogram the function keys " F1 ", " F2 ", " F3 ", " F4 ", " F5 ", " F6 ", " F7 ", " F8 ", "
F9 " and " F10 " .

(one) (two) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

 
COMMAND GENERAL DISPLAY KEYBOARD COM1 COM2 ATTRIBUTE ANSI PROGRAM
PARAMETERS OPTIONS
             

 
PROGRAM = F-KEY
   
E
C
one      
SET = 1
               
F-KEY = F1
                            
  F-KEY LABEL =              
  XMIT DIRECTION = HOST            
  SAVE F-KEY LABEL = ON            
  -------------------------------------------------- ----------        
TOTAL CHAR LEFT: 173
           
  CHAR USED THIS KEY:   two        

PROCEDURE TO PERFORM FOR THE REPROGRAMMING OF THE FUNCTION KEYS :

one- From the main menu, using the arrows “ Å “ “ Ç ”, go to the item “ PROGRAM ”.
 
two- Through the frecha " È ", go in the parameter " F-KEY = F1 ", as represented in the previous programming
( In the “ OPTIONS ” box , the current programming of the “ F1 ” function key will appear , as represented in the
previous programming).
3- Press the " Enter " key to start programming.
4- Press, at the same time, the " × " (shift) keys and the " Esc " key , to cancel any wrong programming.
5- Press, at the same time, the keys " Ctrl " and " [ " (open square parenthesis).
6- Press the " 1 " key .
7- Press the " Enter " key to finish the programming of the " F1 " key .
Now, we move on to programming the function key " F2 ":

1- Press the " F2 " function key ; in the " PARAMETERS " box , it will read: " F-KEY = F2 ". 2-
Repeat points “3-”, “4-” and “5-”, described in the previous procedure.
3- Press the " 2 " key .
4- Press the " Enter " key to finish programming the " F2 " key .

The programming of the other function keys " F3 ", " F4 ", " F5 ", " F6 ", " F7 ", " F8 ", " F9 " and " F10 " is repeated in the
same way as the programming of the " F2 " key. ; naturally, at point "1-", the function key to be reprogrammed must be
pressed, while for point "3-", the following table will be performed:
F1 = 1 F6 = 6
F2 = 2 F7 = 7
F3 = 3 F8 = 8
F4 = E F9 = 9
F5 = R F10 = A

After having correctly programmed the data, it is necessary to save the configuration made, otherwise all the
programming will be lost when the video terminal is turned off.
To save the settings, you need to select the "voice COMMAND ", therefore, choose " SAVE PARAMETERS " ( Par
Backup ), then press the "key Enter " ( CR ); to the confirmation question [ ARE YOU SURE (Y / N)? ], press the " Y " key
. When confirming the save, the screen will display the text “ DONE ”.
At this point to exit “ SETUP ”, press the “ Ctrl ”, “ Alt ” and “ Esc ” keys at the same time on an “ AT ” type keyboard ;
on the contrary, press, contemporaneously, the keys " SHIFT ", " ALT " and " SYSREQ " on an ASCII keyboard .
NOTE: When asked to press more than one key at the same time, it is necessary to press and
  press and hold the first key in the sequence, so press and hold also
  the second key in the sequence, then press the third key, and finally, leave them all at the same
  weather. The "SHIFT" key is indicated on the keyboard as the symbol "ñ"; the “SYSREQ” key is the
  alternative function of the “ PRT SC ” key.

3-134

3.3.4.2 Serial Port Configuration “UFD” (Floppy Disk Unit)

The configuration parameters of the serial port “UFD” are definable using the keyboard function n. 150, described in
paragraph 3.3.1.

Upon memory initialization, the parameters assume the following values:

Parameter Value Description

BAUD-RATE 9600 transmission / reception speed, expressed in bit / sec (baud rate)

LUNGH / BIT 7 bit number of bits in data transmission between UFD and machine

PARITY Odd parity type

STOP BIT one number of stop bits

Verify that the UFD magnetic support is properly adjusted.

3.3.4.3 TFD Software Application (Video Terminal Emulation and UFD)

A particular software application, called TFD, sold by MATEC is protected by a suitable Hardware key, allowing the use
of any Personal Computer, with MS DOS operating system, in emulation of the video terminal and the UFD.

For the installation and use of TFD software, it is necessary to refer to the appropriate instruction manual provided
with the same package.

Relatively to the machine: the connection of a Video Terminal or a UFD, that is to say, of a PC in emulation, is
completely equivalent, except for the eventual need to invert wires 2 and 3 in the RS 232 serial port connector.
 3-135

4. EMPLOYMENT

4.1 ASSEMBLING YARN CONES IN CONE HOLDERS

Correctly mount the spinning cones on the cone holder, and then, based on the article to be made on the machine,
make the different threads pass opportunely through the appropriate rings and / or thread guide tubes, placed on the
same cone holder, then do Pass the same wires correctly through the stop sensors.

4.2 THREAD GUIDE THREAD

With each of the different threads coming from the cones, appropriately mounted in the cone holder, correctly line up
the thread guides of each feed, based on their specific function, relative to the item to be made in the machine: refer to
the following figure 4.2, for the threading operation of the thread guides, it is also possible to use a suitable yarn
clamp: such clamp (code 011-1042-00-9) provided on request.

C = Pattern Color
CR = Stripe Color E
= Elastic
L = Available Thread Guide
N = Nylon Base
NR = Nylon
Reinforcement P =
Background Thread
S = Thread for Sponge
SA = Sponge in Alternating Movement FM
= Machine Front

Figure 4.2

4-1
4.3 INITIAL OPERATION OF THE MACHINE
To be able to start the machine, it is essential to operate in the following mode:

a) Verify the existence, in memory, of one or more items previously programmed, otherwise program at least one.

NOTE: The machine is not intended for operation, in the absence of items programmed in memory.

b) After having verified that the yarn guides are properly fed with the yarn, as described in paragraph 4.2, program
automatic lubrication at intervals of 30 seconds between one spray of oil and the next, and then with the cycle
machine in position " 0 ", press the ( NO CYCLE ) key on the command panel , determining that the relative signal
comes on, then press the green button ( START ): in such condition, it is necessary to run the machine for
approximately one hour of preheating, in order to completely eliminate each eventual residue of antioxide mixture,
previously removed, as described in paragraph 2.8.

c) Press again, on the command panel, the ( NO CYCLE ) key, determining that the relative signal goes off, then press
the green button ( START ), making the machine carry out, approximately 15 minutes, a series of cycles, in order to
verify the correct operation of the different mechanical commands.

d) Finally, have the machine made some socks, in order to verify the good quality of the product.

4.4 FILMING
After the initial start-up of the machine, described in paragraph 4.3, the running-in of the same machine, with the
desired item, must be carried out in a time of approximately 200 hours, programming automatic lubrication at
intervals of 3 minutes between a spray of oil. and the next and running the machine, for all the time mentioned above,
at a maximum speed, programmed no more than 200 rpm.

WARNING : With particular yarns or mesh types, it may be necessary to reduce the previous value of the maximum
running-in speed.

4.5 START TO PRODUCTION

After the break-in, described in paragraph 4.4, the start of production of the machine at its maximum speed must
come programming, for the machine cycle, the most appropriate speeds, relative to the type of yarn to be used and the
typologies. desired mesh size, up to the maximum permitted values, prescribed in paragraph 1.1, and with a three-
minute interval between one spray of oil and the next, at this point put the machine to work.

4-2

4.6 INITIAL MACHINE OPERATION CONDITIONS

Before putting the machine to work, it is necessary to verify that all yarn guides interested in the execution of the
article in progress, on the same machine, are properly fed with the yarn; Relative to the operation of the machine, the
following conditions are distinguished:
a) In the event that the machine is running “cold”, after a stop of approximately 2 hours, it must be operated for at
least 10 minutes at reduced speed, by pressing the ( SLOW ) key on the control panel; for programming the (
SLOW ) key, 50 - 55% of its maximum programmable value is recommended: individual yarns or types of mesh can
request a further reduction of this percentage.

b) In the event that the machine is turned off when, previously, a certain number of preheating machine cycles have
been programmed (as described in paragraph 3.3), the same machine, when it is turned on again, will operate
automatically, at the reduced speed in the "SLOW" condition , the signal will remain on until the end of the execution
of the programmed cycles. At the end of the count, the machine will run automatically at the programmed speed.
When turning on the machine, it is always necessary to verify that no preheating cycles have been previously
programmed, otherwise press the ( SLOW ) key on the control panel, thus determining the output of the reduced
speed condition in "SLOW" turning off the relative signal, or cancel the programming of the same preheating cycles.

c) To put the machine back into production, after a possible stoppage caused by a possible damage message,
indicated on the display and the red "STOP" light on the control panel, first eliminate the cause of the message,
such as It is described in chapter 7, then press the green button ( START ) on the same command panel.

NOTE: Some machine interruption messages, which can be viewed on the control panel display, are fully explanatory,
that is, the relative cause is found in the description of the same message, while the corresponding
corrective action to take is automatically intuitive; for example:
- Broken thread,
- Elastic stop 1,
- Elastic stop 2,
- Insufficient air pressure,
- Etc.
All other messages of interruption of the machine, having causes and corrective actions to be carried out, of
greater complexity, are treated in chapter 7.

WARNING: In case of complete replacement of needles and / or cylinder jacks, it is advisable, after such operation, to
operate the machine for 24 hours, with the maximum speed reduced not beyond 200 rpm: with
particular yarns or types of mesh may be necessary to reduce this value.
After this time, the maximum speed can be reported at the allowed speed value, prescribed in
paragraph 1.1.

4.7 BREAKAGE AND DEPLETION OF POWER WIRE

When a machine feeding wire breaks or runs out, the corresponding wire guide remains unpowered, that is why the
machine itself is interrupted instantly in the "STOP" code , with the subsequent message appearing on the panel
display command. To restore the normal operating condition of the machine, it is necessary to proceed as follows:

- In the event that the "STOP" condition is caused by the breakage of a thread, provide, beforehand, the correct
threading of the thread guide concerned, as described in paragraph 4.2, then restart the machine, as described in
point “c)” of paragraph 4.6;

- In the event that the "STOP" condition is caused by the exhaustion of the thread of a cone, provide, before, to the
correct replacement, in the cone holder, of the exhausted cone with a new cone of identical characteristics, then
carry out the correct threading the wire guide concerned, as described in paragraph 4.2, and finally, restart the
machine, as described in point “c)” of paragraph 4.6.

4-3

4.8 USE OF THE HANDLE TO ADVANCE CYLINDERS

Referring to figure 4.8, the handle (1) (code 177-1704-00-9, supplied by equipment), to advance the cylinder (2), can be
inserted in the upper end of the shaft (3), leaning through the base plate (4), only after removing the cover (5). The
machine is equipped with an adequate electrical protection that prevents the rotation of the motor cylinder (2) with the
cover (5) removed, or out of the station: such protection should never be measured , because the motor rotation
without the cover (5) ) or, even more recklessly, with the handle (1) inserted, it would expose the assigned personnel to
risks of accidents, and damage to the machine itself.

NOTE: By rotating the handle (1) towards the front of the machine (FM), the rotation of the cylinder (2) comes in the
normal direction of movement of the same cylinder (as indicated by the corresponding arrows in the figure)
and vice versa.
 Figure 4.8

4-4

5. ORDINARY MAINTENANCE

WARNING: Correct ordinary maintenance of the machine, with the exclusively "preventive" purpose, is essential both
for its proper functioning and for its long duration. All interventions, described in this chapter, must
be carried out at the indicated time intervals for each of these: these intervals must be absolutely
respected.

5.1 DRAIN FILTER SUCTION PIECES YARN

Referring to figure 5.1, it is necessary to bear in mind that,
periodically, the filter (1) is progressively filled with pieces
of yarn (in a variable time arc, based on the item running
on the machine), therefore, each time If the same filter is
full, it is necessary to carry out the complete discharge, in
the following way:

a) Put the machine in the interruption position by

pressing the red button ( STOP ) of figure 3.2.1
on the control panel .

b) Disconnect the upper casing (2), with the relative

cover (3), completely unloading the pieces of yarn
present inside.

c) From the lower casing (4), extract the part (5),

completely unloading it from the pieces of yarn
present inside.

d) Reinsert the part (5) into the lower casing (4).

e) Reconnect the upper casing (2), with the relative

cover (3).

f) Restart the machine by pressing the green button (

START ) of figure 3.2.1 on the control panel .

WARNING: It is appropriate that, at least once a month,

the part (5) is cleaned by removing the
yarn residues, of which it is covered, by
means of a compressed air gun, in
order not to compromise the correct
aspiration of the machine.
 Figure 5.1

5-1

5.2 DRAIN PRESSURE REGULATOR FILTER

Referring to figure 5.2, at least once a week or, in any case, when the level is
close to the maximum, in the working phase it is necessary to discharge any
condensate water, present inside the pressure regulator filter (1 ), moving the
screw (2).

NOTE: By removing the pressure from the installation, the condensate

discharge comes automatically, as described in paragraph 2.7.

Figure 5.2

5.3 MANUAL LUBRICATION

Manual lubrication, to the machine organs that periodically need such maintenance, is reported in the "MANUAL
LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS TABLE", and refers to figure 5.3; The different interventions mentioned must be carried
out with the help of an oil jet ampoule, a greaser, and a brush, using exclusively the prescribed lubricants, at the
respective time intervals (reported in increasing order).
TABLE OF MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS
N.
                       
DENOMINATION                  
REFERENCE
ORGAN OF THE INTERVENTION OF LUBRICANT INTERVAL: ORGAN OF
   
MACHINE MAKE ONCE EVERY ... MACHINE
     
IN FIGURE
                       
5.3
                       
tree plate of Oil in the relative hole
    @ Week       one
transfer   for lubrication              
Thread guide     Oil in everyone the holes    
          @ Week     two
      of course                
Inner ring plates Oil in all relative @ Week 3
           
      channels     
 
 
             
Thread cutter knife   Greasing of the relative stem
        # Month     
 
 
  4
      in the guide areas              

     
Greasing the headquarters of  
Eventuality   of  
     
the relative cameras with a  
substitution   of  
Pistons pneumatics subtle extract, after of garnishes, or others
  ?? 5
command   to have    cleaned   components of the  

     
carefully the same  
pistons      
venues
                       
Pistons (F1) and (F2) of Greasing in the respective            
figure 6.10, for head of contact with the
    # 6 months       6
centering   jacks spine (P) of figure 6.10              
transfer
                     
    Year; see paragraph
Gearbox Oil replacement     @ 7
                5.3.1     
 
 
   

               
Lowering the level,  
in proximity of the
Lubricator    add oil       @ 8
                (MIN); see paragraph  
5.3.2
                       

WARNING: - At least once a week, spray a jet of oil (@) on all moving parts (of the machine) not provided with a
hole for lubrication.

- At least once a month cover with a brush, a light extract of grease (#) on all the gears of the
machine.

(follow)

5-2
 TABLE OF MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS

WARNING : MATEC is not responsible for damage or inconvenience to the machine, caused by failure to observe
the prescriptions relative to the lubricants to be used.

@ CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LUBRICANT TO BE USED IN THE FILLING OF THE LUBRICATOR AND FOR THE
MECHANICAL ROCE PARTS THAT WANT TO BE LUBRIFIED WITH OIL

The oil, specified here, must have the following characteristics:

- Viscosity grade  
: ISO VG 32 to ISO VG 46
- Medium kinematic viscosity at 40 ° C (ASTM D88-D445 standard)   : 32 to 46 mm 2 / s (cSt)
- Viscosity index between 40 and 100 ° C (ASTM D2270 standard) :> 90
- Anti-wear property (ASTM D2266 standard)     : 0.45-0.55 mm
- N ° of neutralization (ASTM D664 standard):
 
. New oil   : 1 to 1.5 mmgKOH / g
. Oil after 500 hours of operation   : 0.1 to 0.2 mmgKOH / g
- Corrosive aggressiveness towards copper (ASTM D130 standard) : grade 1
- Flow point (ASTM D97 standard)     : <- 5 ° C
- Flash point (ASTM D92 standard)   :> 170 ° C
- Aniline point (ASTM D611-64 standard )   :> 100 ° C
- Washability   : yes

# CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LUBRICANT TO BE USED FOR THE MECHANICAL PARTS OF ROCE THAT WANT
TO BE LUBRIFIED WITH NORMAL GREASE

The grease, specified here, must have the following characteristics:

- Graduation "NLGI EP 2" or "NLGI EP 3", based on ASTM standards

- Presence of molybdenum disulfide
- Presence of "EP" additives for extreme pressures
- Water resistance
- Anti-wear, anti-rust (antioxidant), anti-corrosion additives
- Optimal adhesiveness
- Penetration from 220 to 295 dmm at 25 ° C

?? CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LUBRICANT TO BE USED FOR THE ROCE MECHANICAL PARTS (PNEUMATIC
PADS) THAT WANT TO BE LUBRIFIED WITH SPECIAL GREASE

The grease, specified here, must have the following characteristics:

- Graduation "NLGI 2", based on ASTM standards

- Exemption of additives "EP"
- Molybdenum disulfide exemption
- Presence of lithium
- Water resistance
- Anti-wear, anti-rust (antioxidant), anti-corrosion additives
- Optimal adhesiveness
- Penetration from 220 to 295 dmm at 25 ° C

WARNING: Absolutely avoid contaminating the grease, specified here, with other types of grease or oil.

(end of frame)

5-3
 Figure 5.3

5-4

5.3.1 Oil Replacement in the Transmission Case

Referring to figure 5.3.1, at the time intervals prescribed in the "MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS TABLE" in
paragraph 5.3, carry out the following operations:

a) Unscrew the lower cover (1), also removing the relative washer (2), under the transmission box (3), then
completely drain the oil contained in the transmission box, in a suitable discharge container.

b) Screw back the lower cover (1), with the relative washer (2), under the transmission box (3).

c) Unscrew the upper cover (4), on the base plate (5).

d) Fill the transmission case (3) with new oil (prescribed in the "MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS CHART"
in paragraph 5.3), pouring the same oil into the hole (6) and progressively checking the filling through the oil
gauge. level (7): the oil level must approximately coincide with the horizontal reference line, printed on the level
indicator.

e) Screw the upper cover (4) back into the hole (6).
 Figure 5.3.1

5-5

5.3.2 Adding Oil to the lubricator

Referring to figure 5.3.2, the lubricator (1) is intended to supply oil to the automatic lubrication points of the machine,
connected with appropriate sprinklers, which emit an exact quantity in the preset time interval, programmable in
minutes. The points lubricated automatically are the following:

- n. 2 to the mesh formation groups;

- n. 2 to the upper layer ring of the cylinder jacks;
- n. 2 to the plate ring;
- n. 1 to the cylinder holder bearings;
- n. 1 to the drive arm of the transfer plate.

During machine operation, the level of the lubricator container

(1) drops constantly, therefore, when the same level is close to
the (MIN), indicated in this, it is necessary to add oil, of the type
prescribed in the "TABLE OF MANUAL LUBRICATION
INTERVENTIONS" in paragraph 5.3, up to the level (MAX),
pouring the same oil, through the appropriate hole, after having
removed the relative cover (2), then reinserting the latter; In the
course of the adding operation, through the appropriate hole,
mentioned above, it is necessary not to let the oil out of the
same hole.

Figure 5.3.2

WARNING: Do not absolutely mix the oil contained in the lubricator (1) with already used oil, if it is not properly filtered
and prevented.

If the following conditions are verified:

- Insufficient oil, under the level (MIN), in the lubricator container (1),
- difficult oil filtering,
- excessive presence of slag, inside the main filter (3) returning the oil,

The machine is automatically interrupted, with the appearance of the following message on the control panel display,
as described in chapter 7.

In the event that the lubricator (1) runs out of oil, it is possible that some air balls are formed, visible inside the
different connection pipes of the lubrication system: in this case, it is necessary to manually operate the solenoid
valve command of the oil supply, for several times and short intervals of time, until the air balls do not completely
disappear from all the tubes.

NOTE: In the event that oil filtering is difficult, it is necessary to consult paragraphs 5.4, 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.

5-6
5.4 LUBRICATOR CLEANING
Periodically, it is necessary to clean the lubricator, in order to prevent possible inconveniences caused by incorrect oil
filtering, as described in paragraphs 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.

5.4.1 Cleaning Main Filter and Magnetic Lubricator Cartridge

Referring to figure 5.3.2, at least once every 3 months, carry out the following operations:

a) In the lubricator (1), remove the main filter (3) by removing, from the latter, the magnetic cartridge (4).

b) Wash the main filter (3) and the magnetic cartridge (4) with gasoline, then blow them both with a compressed air
gun, in order to completely eliminate any possible residue of slag and gasoline.

c) Reassemble the magnetic cartridge (4) in the main filter (3), then reinserting the whole group in the lubricator
(1).

d) If necessary, add the missing oil to the lubricator (1) in order to restore the correct level, as described in
paragraph 5.3.2.

5.4.2 Cleaning Internal Organs of the Lubricator

Referring to figure 5.3.2, at least once a year, carry out the following operations:

a) Remove the cover (5) from the lubricator (1).

b) Using a suitable device, suck up all the oil present in the lubricator (1), then wash it internally with gasoline, and
blow it out using a compressed air gun, in order to completely eliminate any possible residue of slag and of gas.

c) Remove the filter (6) from the cover (5), then wash it with gasoline, blow it out using a compressed air gun, in
order to completely eliminate any possible residue of slag and gasoline.

d) Remove, from the cover (5), the main filter (3) with the relative magnetic cartridge (4), then carry out the
appropriate cleaning operations on these elements, as previously described in paragraph 5.4.1.

e) Fill the lubricator (1) with new oil, up to the level (MAX).

WARNING: Do not absolutely fill the lubricator (1) with the previously used oil, if it is not properly filtered and
prevented.

f) Reassemble correctly, in the lubricator (1), all the parts previously removed.

5-7

6. EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE

NOTE: All the paragraphs contained in this chapter, referring exclusively to

  “Extraordinary maintenance” interventions cannot be preventable as the
  “ordinary maintenance” interventions, described in chapter 5; These essentially deal with
  the following types of operations:
- filings, registrations, etc., which, being exclusively "corrective", are
 
  generally necessary after having carried out maintenance interventions on the machine.
  disassembly, eventual replacement and subsequent reassembly of the complete or partial groups;

- substitutions, etc., which refer to parts of the machine that require a particular
 
  complexity and care in the relative disassembly and subsequent reassembly operations.

The different paragraphs, in the progressive order assigned to them, allow a correct and
 
  complete calibration on point of the machine, which, anyway, always comes
completely fastened and registered in MATEC, before its expedition.
 

6.1 FASADURA ENCODER

Referring to figure 6.1, the fastening of the encoder (1) must be carried out in the following way:
a) Turn on the machine and wait for the heating of the cams of all the selection devices to be complete:
consequently, all the cams of the selection devices will turn down. At this point, at the base of the machine,
remove the connection shaft protection cover from the appropriate handle for manual advancement of the
cylinder, therefore insert it correctly in the corresponding seat on the same shaft (as described in paragraph 4.8
). After this operation, on the rear side of the machine and with the help of a screwdriver, lift the penultimate
selection cam (S) up high (the second, from top to bottom) on the selection device (A) of 2 ^ feeding.

b) On the front of the machine, insert the fastening spine (P) (code 064-1317-00-9) into the reference hole (H) of
the support (2), therefore, move the handle to the manual advancement of the cylinder, even when the same
fastening spine, pressed manually over the cylinder, enters the corresponding reference channel of the cylinder
holder: in such condition, the cylinder will be in the "MECHANICAL ZERO" position and also comes
automatically The selection diagonal has been identified, in correspondence of the 2nd power supply, in which it
is necessary, afterwards, to act for the correct fastening of the encoder (1).

NOTE: The "MECHANICAL ZERO" position of the cylinder corresponds to two blunt fins, located on the upper side of
the same cylinder, in correspondence with the outer ring of the plates.
c) Remove the fastening spine (P) from the reference hole (H) of the support (2), therefore, in the selection device
(A) of 2nd supply, check that, to the right of the penultimate cam of selection (S) high (the second, from top to
bottom), the heel (T) of the corresponding cylinder jack (J), seen from the outside, is at a distance (X) of 1 - 1.5
mm; In the event that the distance value (X) does not return to the prescribed field, slowly move the handle to
manually advance the cylinder until the desired condition is reached.
d) Rotate the electrical cabinet (3), entering the internal part of the machine base, therefore, remove the card
protection cover at the back of the electrical cabinet: with the cylinder stopped, in the position previously
described in point "c)", the four LEDs (L1) green, (L2) yellow, (L3) and (L4) red, on the "Interface" card (4), must
all be on. In the event that the four LEDs (L1), (L2), (L3) and (L4) do not all turn on, it is necessary to first remove
the cover (C), under the "Brushless" motor (5), for Therefore, loosen the three screws (6), to fix the support disk
(7) of the encoder (1), but absolutely avoiding loosening another screw not mentioned, then manually turn
the encoder (1) in both directions, until the four LEDs mentioned above all turn on; at this point, re-lock the three
screws (6) on the support disc (7), taking care not to move the correct position of the encoder (1), previously
obtained, then reassemble the cover (C) under the "Brushless" motor (5).

NOTE: The green and (L2) yellow LEDs (L1) are intended to count the step-by-step pulses (channels) of the encoder
(1), the red led (L3) is intended for "ZERO ENCODER" and the red led (L4 ) is intended for "ZERO CYLINDER":
only the two red LEDs (L3) and (L4) lit show the exact phase condition of the encoder (1).
e) After finishing, reassemble the card protection cover at the back of the electrical cabinet (3), rolling the latter
until it is closed, on the base of the machine, therefore, remove the handle to the manual advancement of the
cylinder of the seat of the corresponding shaft, of the base plate of the machine, finally, reassemble the
protection cover of the same shaft.

6-1
 Figure 6.1

6-2

6.2 REGISTRATION OF SELECTION DEVICES

The registration of all the selection devices, present on the machine, must be carried out as described below, in
paragraphs 6.2.1 and 6.2.2.

6.2.1 Registration Alignment Selection Cams with Heels Jacks Cylinder

Referring to figure 6.2.1, the registration of the alignment of the eight selection cams, commanded by the respective
electromagnets, must be carried out as follows:

a) In particular, in cases of disassembly, eventual replacement and subsequent reassembly of the selection
devices, after such operations, it is necessary to verify that the upper external end of the first selection cam (1)
in the lower part, in position of work (bone below), is perfectly aligned with the upper plane of the corresponding
butt of the cylinder jack (2).

b) To obtain the condition, previously described in point “a)”, it is necessary to bear in mind that the difference
between the value (V1), printed on the base (3) of the object selection device and the value (V2) , printed in the
lower plane of the group (4), in correspondence of the part in which the same selection device must be
mounted, is equivalent to the value of the thickness to interpose between the base (3), of the selection device,
and the Relative fixing plane of the group (4): therefore, for each selection device, it will be necessary to use the
appropriate thicknesses (5), to compress the aforementioned difference between the values (V1) and (V2).

Figure 6.2.1
 6-3

6.2.2 Cylinder Selection Cam Distance Registration

Referring to figure 6.2.2, the registration of the distance of the cylinder selection cams must be carried out in the
following way:

a) Relative to the 3 selección feed double selection device (D), the extremities of each of the eight pairs of
selection cams for patterns (L) and the extremity of each of the two lower double cams for fixed selections (F )
must be equidistant from the cylinder between them; Such condition is obtainable by loosening, first, the fixing
screw (1), then, operating on the eccentric head (2), under the relative projection (S) at the base of the group (3),
until reaching the desired position, finally, re-locking the fixing screw (1).

b) The distance (X) of the end of one of the selection cams for drawings (L), of 1ˆ, 2ˆ, 3ˆ and 4ˆ feeding, in its
working position (that is, lowered), of the cylinder, must be 0 , 6 ± 0.05mm; Such value is obtainable by
loosening, first, the fixing nut (4), then, operating on the registration screw (5), until reaching the desired
position, finally, re-locking the fixing nut (4).

c) The distance (Y) of the end of each one of the cams for the fixed selections (F), of 1ˆ, 2ˆ, 3ˆ and 4ciones feeds,
in their working position (that is, activated by the relative pneumatic control pistons) , from the cylinder, it
should turn out 0.6 ± 0.05 mm; such value is obtained by operating the register nut (6).

Figure 6.2.2

6-4

6.3 REGISTRATION OF MESH TRAINING GROUPS

The registration of all the mesh formation groups, present on the machine, must be carried out as described below, in
paragraphs 6.3 1 and 6.3.2.

6.3.1 Passage Registration Between Mesh Formation Trucks and Relative Contracamones

Referring to figure 6.3.1, the registration of the passage between the mesh formation trucks (1) and the relative
counter trucks (2) must be carried out as follows:

a) Disassemble all the mesh formation groups from the machine.

b) The passage between the mesh-forming truck (1) and the relative counter-truck (2) must be 3.11-3.13 mm
, either at point (X) or at point (Y) ; the passage, either at point (X) or at point (Y), is controllable by means of
the gauge (C) (code 090-5238-01-9).

c) Loosen the screw (3), then lock the counter cam (2), in the part (4), in a slightly moved position, with respect to
the definitive one; successively, using the gauge (C), position the mesh formation lug (1), at point (X), to the
correct value, then definitively re-lock it, finally bringing the screw (5) closer.

d) Unlock the counter cam (2), then moving it along the relative flow channel, then, using the gauge (C), tighten the
screw (3) again until the same counter cam is positioned, at point (Y ), in the correct value, in order to
definitively lock the counter cam (2).

e) Check again, at points (X) and (Y), the passages to the prescribed value, using the previous gauge (C):
eventually, retouch the positions previously recorded, but bearing in mind that a very narrow passage between
the truck The mesh formation (1) and the counter cam (2) can determine an excessive consumption of the
needle heels, although, particularly, at point (Y) it is essential to achieve extreme precision, in order to obtain the
best possible control of the heels of the same needles.

NOTE: Before reassembling all the mesh forming units on the machine, it is necessary to verify the
height of the mesh formation trucks (1), as described in paragraphs 6.3.2.
 

Figure 6.3.1

6-5

6.3.2 Mesh Formation Truck Height Registration

Referring to figure 6.3.2, the registration of the height of the mesh formation trucks (1) must be carried out in the
following way:

a) With all the mesh formation groups, previously removed from the machine and registered as described in
paragraph 6.3.1, fix the mesh formation group, on object, on the plate (P) (code 064-0694-00- 9), on the
 opposite side to the one with the running channel (S), by means of its two fixing screws
(two).

b) Check that the distance between the mesh forming truck (1), pressed down, and the plane of the plate
(P) are within the allowed limits, by means of the calibrator (B) (passes and does not pass), having the
following codes:

- 064-1252-00-9, for the 1 ^ and for the 3 ^ feeding;

- 064-0688-00-9, for the 2 ^ and for the 4 ^ supply.

c) Eventually, record the height of the mesh formation truck (1), loosening the fixing screw (3), then moving the
registration screw (4), until reaching the desired position, finally, re-lock the fixing screw
(3).

d) Disassemble the mesh formation group, in object, from the plate (P), fixing it, successively, on the side of the
same plate having the running channel (S): in such condition, check that the distance between the formation
truck mesh (1) and the plane of the plate (P) are within the allowed limits, using the gauge (B).

e) Eventually, record the height of the mesh formation truck (1), loosening the fixing nut (5), then moving the
registration screw (6), until reaching the desired position, finally, re-locking the fixing nut (5 ).

f) After having carried out the aforementioned operations on all the mesh forming groups, correctly reassemble
the latter on the machine.

Figure 6.3.2

6-6

6.4 MESH REDUCTION REGISTRATION

Referring to figure 6.4, the recording of mesh reduction should be carried out as follows:

a) Verify that all mesh formation trucks are correctly registered, in height, as described in paragraph 6.3.2.

b) The recording of the rotational course of the ring (1), for the movement of the mesh-forming trucks, must be
carried out by first loosening the screw (2) that fixes the bearing (3) (located on the front of the machine) , then
bringing the other two bearings (4) and (5) closer to the running diameter of the group (6) and interposing,
between the bearing (3) and the aforementioned running diameter, a thickness of 0.05 mm; finally, re-lock the
screw (2), removing the aforementioned thickness and checking that the ring (1) rotates freely throughout the
entire working course.
c) The eccentric (7) must be registered in a corresponding position of approximately half of its total course.

d) Align the fastening plate (8) with the reference line, printed on the truck (9), so that the bearing (10) is
positioned at the maximum diameter of the same truck (9); at this point rotate the truck (9). until bringing the
contact point of the bearing (10), in the same truck (9), to approximately 2 mm from the start of the step (S): in
this condition, the stop plate (11) must be in contact with the tip the fastening plate (8). Eventually, record the
position of the stop plate (11), first loosening the relative fixing screw (12), then, positioning the same plate in
the desired condition, and finally, re-locking the fixing screw (12).

e) Verify that the mesh formation trucks (13) of 1 ^ feeding and (14) of 3 ^ feeding turn completely down at the
distance of 16 mm, between the lowest points and the upper plane of the group (6): such value it must be
measured with the help of a comparator.

f) The eventual height recording of the mesh formation trucks (13) of 1 ^ feeding and (14) of 3 ^ feeding must be
carried out by first loosening the fixing screw (15), then insert, between the screw head (16) and the stop side of
the cam (17), of each of the two groups forming mesh, in object, a thickness of 0.1 mm, then screwing the
screw (16), until determining a friction; re-lock the fixing screw (15), finally, remove the aforementioned
thickness.

g) Rotate the truck (9) approximately half of its total course.

h) In the 2 ^ and 4 ^ feed mesh formation groups, activate the respective pneumatic control pistons, so that it
determines the contact of the stop side of the cam (18) with the head of the screw (19), then loosen the fixing
screw (20), then move the screw (19), until the mesh formation trucks (21) of 2 ^ feeding and (22) of 4 ^ feeding
are positioned, at the same height as the formation trucks mesh placed in the other feeds: such height must be
measured with the help of the comparator, previously mentioned in point "e)".
i) The eventual recording of the lifting of the mesh formation trucks (21) of 2 ^ feeding and (22) of 4 ^ feeding
must be carried out with the respective pneumatic control pistons deactivated, first loosening the fixing screw
(23) , then move the screw (24), until the two mesh-forming trucks, in object, do not lift, from a portion equal to
approximately 1.5 mm, finally, re-lock the fixing screw (23): the value of the The lifting of the two mesh
formation trucks, in object, must be measured with the help of the comparator, mentioned above in points "e)"
and "h)".

6-7

Always referring to figure 6.4, if the machine is provided with the "ROSSO Overlock Kit with Sock Preparation according
to the New ROSSO Procedure", it is necessary to carry out the following additional operations:

- With the adjunctive pneumatic piston (25) deactivated, the mesh formation truck (13) of the 1st feed should be
at the same height as the mesh formation trucks of the other feeds; Such condition is obtainable by loosening,
first, the fixing nut (26), then moving the registration screw (27), until reaching the desired position, finally, re-
lock the fixing nut (26).

- With the adjunctive pneumatic piston (25) activated, the distance (X), between the stop side of the registration
nut (28) and the corresponding stop side of the support (29), should be approximately 5 mm; Such value is
obtainable by loosening, first, the fixing nut (30), then moving the registration nut (28), until reaching the desired
position, finally, re-lock the fixing nut (30) on the registration nut (28 ).

WARNING: The value of the distance (X), mentioned above, may vary based on the number of needles, with which the
cylinder is provided, and the desired mesh width.
 6-8

Figure 6.4

6-9
6.5 REGISTRATION OF DISTANCE GROUPS FORMING MESH AND NEEDLE BOLTS FROM THE
CYLINDER
Referring to figure 6.5, the recording of the distance of the mesh formation groups and the needle bolts from the
cylinder must be carried out in the following way:

a) The distance of the mesh forming groups (1) and (2) in the respective axis, it should be 0.2 to 0.3 mm from the
cylinder, relative to the two or movement (so fully inserted); such value is obtainable by moving the respective
registration nut (3).
Successively, control the distance of the mesh forming groups (1) and (2) in the respective axis, relatively to the
one or motion (so partly inserted): said distance should be 0.2 to 0.3 mm heels the needles of minimum height;
Such value is obtainable by loosening, first, the fixing nut (4), then moving the registration nut (5), until reaching
the desired position, finally, re-lock the fixing nut (4).

b) The distance of the mesh formation groups (6) and (7), on the respective axis, must be 0.2 - 0.3 mm from the
cylinder, in the working position; such value is obtainable by moving the respective registration nut (3).

c) The distance of the needle stopped bolts (8) and (9), on the respective shaft, should be from 0.2 to 0.3 mm
from the cylinder, relative to the two or movement (so fully inserted); such value is obtainable by moving the
respective registration nut (10).
Successively, control the distance of the needles arrested bolts (8) and (9) in the respective axis, relatively to
the one or motion (so partly inserted): said distance should be 0.2 to 0.3 mm from the heels the needles of
medium height; Such value is obtainable by loosening, first, the fixing nut (11), then moving the registration nut
(12), until reaching the desired position, finally, re-lock the fixing nut (11).

d) The distance of the stopped needle bolt (13), on the axis itself, must be 0.2 - 0.3 mm from the heels of the
medium height needles, in the working position; such value is obtainable by moving the register nut itself (10).

e) The distance of the sponge separating bolts (14), (15) and (16), on the respective axis, must be 0.2 - 0.3 mm
from the heels of the medium height needles, in working position ; such value is obtainable by moving the
respective registration nut (10).

f) The distance between the needle bolts for sponge (17) and (18) and the bolt (19), in order to advance the mesh
formation of 2 ^ feeding, in the respective axis, must be 0.2 - 0.3 mm from cylinder, in working position; Such
value is obtained by moving the respective registration nut (20).

g) The distance of the needles discharged bolt (21), the shaft itself must be 0.2 to 0.3 mm from the cylinder,
relative to the two or movement assembly (bone completely introdicido); such value is obtainable by moving the
register nut (20) itself.
Successively, the control distance needles discharged bolt (21), on the own axis relatively to the one or
movement assembly (partially inserted bone): said distance should be 0.2 to 0.3 mm from the heels of the
needles minimum height ; This value is obtained by loosening, first, the fixing nut (22), then moving the
registration nut (23), until reaching the desired position, finally, re-lock the fixing nut (22).

h) The distance of the levelers (24), (25) and (26), on the respective axis, must be 0.2 - 0.3 mm from the cylinder,
in the working position; such value is obtainable by moving the register nut itself (10).

i) The distance of the needle lowering bolt (27), on the axis itself, must be 0.2 - 0.3 mm from the cylinder, in the
working position; such value is obtainable by moving the register nut itself (10).

l) The distance of the bolt for stopped selection (28) must be 0.3 - 0.4 mm from the cylinder, in working position;
Such value is obtainable by loosening, first, the fixing nut (29), then moving the registration screw (30), until
reaching the desired position, finally, re-lock the fixing nut (29).

6-10
 Figure 6.5

6-11

6.6 REGISTRATION OF WIRE GUIDE GROUPS

Referring to figure 6.6, the registration of the thread guide groups must be carried out in the following way:

a) To register the thread guide nozzles (1) in depth, loosen the two screws (2), then advance the thread guide
nozzle (1), until it reaches a distance (X) of approximately 0.1 mm of the front part of the barbed needles
closed, with the arm (3) raised; by moving the registration screw (4), after having loosened the relative fixing nut
(5), bring the thread guide nozzle (1) to the level of the unloaded needles so that when entering, it passes the
same needles to the aforementioned distance (X) then re-lock the fixing nut (5).
b) For the registration, in height, of the thread guide gaps (1), the distance (H), between their upper plane (R) and
the upper end of the head of the unloaded needles, must be 8.5 ± 0, 05 mm for all feeds; Such value can be
controlled by means of the gauge (T) (code 064-1251-00-9) and can be obtained by loosening, first, the fixing
nut (5), then, moving the registration screw (4), until reach the desired position, finally loosen the fixing nut (5).
At this point, loosen the fixing nut (6), then move the registration screw (7), until the lower part of the screw
reaches a distance of approximately 0.05 mm, from the head of the pneumatic piston (8) deactivated, then
loosen the fixing nut (6).

c) To register the height (K), indicated in detail (A), between the different thread guides in work and the upper
plane of the thread guide gaps (1), relative to each thread guide, first loosen the fixing screw (9), then move the
registration screw (10), until reaching the desired position, finally, re-lock the fixing screw (9); Relative to the
quota (K), for all the thread guides of each feed, illustrated in detail (A), it is necessary to refer to the following
values:
- approximately 5 mm, for the thread guides (11);
- approximately 0.5 mm, for the thread guides (12) and (13).

WARNING : - In case of selection with needle float patterns, the value of (K), for the thread guides (11), used for
the background thread, must be adapted to the height corresponding to such selection.

- The values of the height (K), previously indicated, are indicative and therefore may vary
based on the type of yarn in work and the article in execution on the machine.

d) For the radial registration of the thread guides (11) and (12), in the raised position, they must pass by pressing
the noses of the open reed needles at a distance (Y) of approximately 0.2 mm, as illustrated. in detail (A); Such
value is obtainable by loosening, first, the respective fixing screws (14) and (15), then, longitudinally moving the
thread guide concerned, until reaching the desired position, finally, re-locking the respective fixing screws (14)
and (15 ).

e) For the position of exclusion of the different thread guides, variable based on the type of thread guide and the
type of mesh to be made, relative to each thread guide loosen, first, the fixing screw (16), then move the
registration screw (17), until reaching the desired height, finally, loosen the fixing screw (16); After this
operation, it is necessary to verify that, in the exclusion position, no thread guide is in contact in the plane (P) of
the support (18), but that between the upper side of each thread guide and the previous plane (P) there are a
distance of at least 0.5 mm.

6-12
 Figure 6.6

6-13

6.7 AUTOMATIC REGISTRATION OF STOP CONTROL NEEDLES AND THREAD

Referring to figure 6.7, the registration of the needle and spinning stop control automatics must be carried out as
follows:
a) The mobile automatic (1), to control needle bead breakage and yarn accumulation, in full entry position, must
be positioned at a distance (H) of approximately 0.5 mm above the nose of the sinkers (2) , while in its
intermediate position it must be aligned with the end of the needle head (3), as indicated in detail (A); the
 registration condition is obtainable by moving, first, the item (4), with the rod (5) completely exited and,
successively, in the item (6), in the same way, approximately 4.5 mm backwards with respect to the position
intermediate.
Angularly, the mobile automatic (1) must be positioned in the vicinity of the first rising needle that comes out of
the level (L) of the plates (2), as indicated in detail (A); The registration condition is obtainable by loosening,
first, the fixing screw (7), then by angularly moving the support (8), until reaching the desired position, finally by
re-locking the fixing screw (7).

b) In working position, the mobile automatic (9), to control the needle barbs, under the thread guide device (10) of
1st feed, between the third-last needle (X) and the penultimate needle (Y) rising to the distance (K) 0.5-1 mm
under the head of the needle (11) that passes in front of the same mobile automatic, as indicated in detail (B);
the registration conditions are obtainable:

- angularly and in depth, after having loosened the fixing screw (12), of the support (13);

- in height, after having loosened the two fixing screws (14), on the support (13).

At the last registrations, loosen the fixing screws (12) and (14) on the support (13).

c) The two fixed automatics (15) and (16) must be positioned on the 1 ^ and 3 ^ feed thread guide device (10), on
the first unloaded needle (W) and at a distance (J) of 0.5- 1 mm under the head of the needle (17), as indicated
in detail (C); the registration conditions are obtainable:

- angularly, after having loosened the fixing screws (18), of the support (19);

- in depth, after having loosened the fixing screw (20);

- In height, first loosening the fixing screw (20), then rotating the two fixed automatics (15) and (16)
around the longitudinal axis itself.

At the last registrations, loosen the screws (18) and (20).

6-14
 Figure 6.7

6-15

6.8 REGISTRATION OF NEEDLE OPENERS

The registration of all the needle openers, present on the machine, must be carried out as described below: in
paragraph 6.8.1 for the two pneumatic needle openers, always present on the machine, and in paragraph 6.8.2 for the
mechanical needle opener , only for machines with needles of thickness 0.7 mm and 0.6 mm.

6.8.1 Pneumatic Needle Opener Registration

Referring to figure 6.8.1, the registration of the pneumatic needle opener (1) set to 1st supply, and of the pneumatic
needle opener (2), set to 2nd supply, must be carried out as follows:

a) Angularly, the two needle openers (1) and (2) must be positioned on the first needle (N), rising, coming out of
the level (L) of the plates (3).

b) In depth, the two needle openers (1) and (2) must be positioned in the center of the end of the closed tab of the
needle (N) mentioned above.

c) In height, the end of the two needle openers (1) and (2) must be positioned at a distance (H) of approximately
17 mm above the level (L) of the plates (3), or at a distance ( K) approximately 3 mm above the level (S) of the
discharged needles.

d) The recordings of the conditions described above are obtainable in the following way:

- For the angular and height position of the needle opener (1), first loosen the screw (4), then move the
support (5), until reaching the desired conditions, finally, re-lock the screw (4).

- For the depth position of the needle opener (1), first loosen the screw (6), then move the needle opener
longitudinally until the desired condition is reached, finally, re-lock the screw (6).

- For the deep angular position of the needle opener (2), first loosen the screw (7), then move the support (8),
until reaching the desired conditions, finally, re-lock the screw (7).

- For the height position of the needle opener (2), first loosen the screw (9), then move the same needle
opener longitudinally, until reaching the desired condition, finally, re-lock the screw (9).

6-16
 Figure 6.8.1

6-17

6.8.2 Mechanical Needle Opener Registration (Only for Machines with 0.7mm and 0.6mm Thick Needles)

Referring to figure 6.8.2, the registration of the mechanical needle opener (1), present only in machines with needles
of thickness 0.7 mm and 0.6 mm, must be carried out as follows:
WARNING : The mechanical needle opener (1) must move freely, along its entire course, over the sinker ring (2) and
under the 1st feed thread guide bushing (3), without ever coming into contact with such parts;
otherwise, it is necessary to slightly bend the mechanical needle opener (1) upwards or
downwards, as much as necessary to eliminate any contact with the aforementioned parts.

a) Similarly, the tip of the mechanical needle opener (1), in the working position, must be placed:

- between the 2nd needle (N2) and the 3rd needle (N3) rising, at the level (L) of the sinkers (S), on machines
with needle numbers from 120 to 144, as illustrated in the detail (TO);

- between the 3rd needle (N3) and the 4th needle (N4) rising, at the level (L) of the sinkers (S), on machines
with needle numbers from 160 to 200, as illustrated in the detail (TO).

In depth, the tip of the mechanical needle opener (1), in working position, must be placed in correspondence of
the vertical axis (H), passing through the center (C) of the needle head (N), with its own tongue (P) in impact
position with the same needle opener.
In height, the tip of the mechanical needle opener (1), in working position, must be placed under the lower end
of the needle head (N), previously mentioned (X) of 1.5 - 2 mm.

The three conditions, mentioned above, are obtainable globally, operating in the following way:

- loosen the two fixing screws (4) of the support (5);

- loosen the two fixing screws (6) of the pneumatic needle opener (1), then centering the oval guide
(T) with respect to the heads of the two fixing screws, then re-lock the last two.

- loosen the fixing nut (7), then move the registration screw (8), until it is positioned approximately halfway
through its screwing excursion;

- manually moving the support (5), position the tip of the mechanical needle opener (1) according to the three
conditions mentioned above, then loosen the two fixing screws (4);

- If necessary , it is possible to globally retouch the three positions in question, first loosening the fixing nut
(7), then moving the registration screw (8), until the exact same positions are reached, finally, loosen the
locking nut fixing (7).

WARNING : After having carried out all the operations, previously described in point "a)", it is advisable to verify that
with the mechanical needle opener (1) in the working position and rotating the cylinder using a
suitable advance handle (as described in paragraph 4.8)
or by pressing the black button ( JOG ) on the control panel, the needle tongues (N) open freely,
without putting resistance and without causing vibrations to the needle opener.

b) In the exclusion position, the tip of the mechanical needle opener (1) must be placed at a distance (Y) of 2 - 3
mm, from the external edge of the 1st feed thread guide nozzle (3); Such value is obtainable by moving the
registration nut (9): in this position, first loosen the fixing nut (10), then move the stop screw (11), until the head
of the latter comes into contact with the side. (F) of the support (12), finally, loosen the fixing nut (10).

6-18
 Figure 6.8.2

6-19

6.9 PLATINAS RING GROUP REGISTRATION

The registration of the ring plate group must be carried out as described below, in paragraphs 6.9.1 and 6.9.2.

6.9.1 Platen Ring Bearing Set Registration

Referring to figure 6.9.1, the record of the play of the bearings of the plate ring (1) must be carried out as follows:

a) Remove the entire plate ring group (1) from the machine.

b) Loosen the two screws (2) of the adjustable bearing (3).

c) Place the caliper (C) in the plate ring (1); the calibrator (C) corresponds to the following codes:

- 064-1438-00-9, for machines with 1 mm and 0.85 mm thick needles;

- 064-1122-00-9, for machines with needles of thickness 0.7 mm and 0.6 mm.

d) Bring the registrable bearing (3) closer to the edge of the gauge (C), with no play, but absolutely avoiding
forcing the bearing (3) and the two non-registrable bearings (4) and (5), in the same caliper, then check that all
the aforementioned bearings move freely on the edge of the caliper (C).

e) Relock the two screws (2), with the adjustable bearing (3) in the condition previously described in point "d)".

f) Remove the gauge (C) from the plate ring (1).

g) Reassemble the entire plate ring group (1) on the machine.

WARNING : In case of replacement of the bearings (3), (4) and (5) it is also necessary to replace the respective
supports (6), (7) and (8).

Figure 6.9.1

6-20
6.9.2 Platen Ring Angular Position Registration

Referring to figure 6.9.2, the recording of the angular position of the sinker ring (1) must be carried out in the following
way:

a) The correct "0" position of the sinker ring (1) is determined by aligning, on the front of the machine, the index
(2) with the line (3), printed on the thread guide support ring (4); the present condition must appear after having
carried out, in order, the following operations:

- program keyboard function n. 144 (motor command);

- select "HOME" (zero engines);
- enter "3" (number of the step-by-step motor of the plate ring).

The eventual recording of the “0” position of the plate ring (1) is obtained by first loosening the screw (5), then
by manually moving the sensor (6) and successively pressing the "ENTR" key after each movement of the same
sensor, until reaching the condition mentioned above, finally, re-lock the screw
(5).

b) In the areas of work with the elastic, in continuous movement, all the threads must be deposited under the
noses of the plates (7): more precisely, in the support plane (P); Such a condition is obtainable by modifying, if
necessary, position "5" of the step-by-step motor of the plate ring (1), using the keyboard function n. 174,
bearing in mind that said position corresponds to approximately 50 steps and that a higher value corresponds
to a greater advance, clockwise, of the plate ring (1).
c) In the alternate movement zones (heel and toe), the edge (S) of the sinks (7), with respect to the edge (N) of the
needles (8), must be identical in both directions of rotation of the cylinder , with the excursion (X), between the
start of the rise of the needles (8) and the start of the reentry of the plates (7) (at the maximum thrust), equal to
approximately 4 plates during the execution of the zones of decreased heel and toe and approximately 3 sinkers
during the execution of the increased heel and toe areas. This condition is obtained by modifying, if necessary,
the positions from “1” to “4” of the step-by-step motor of the plate ring (1), using the keyboard function n.
174, bearing in mind the meaning of the same positions as follows:

- position "1" is relative to the rotation of the cylinder clockwise (back) during the execution of the decreased
heel and toe areas;

- position "2" is relative to the rotation of the cylinder in a counterclockwise (going) direction during the
execution of the decreased heel and toe areas;

- position "3" is relative to the rotation of the cylinder clockwise (back) during the execution of the increased
heel and toe areas;

- position "4" is relative to the rotation of the cylinder in an anticlockwise direction (going) during the
execution of the increased heel and toe areas.

d) In the sponge mesh work areas, in continuous movement, the thread of the same sponge, caught by the needles
(8), must always be deposited in the upper plane (T) (on the noses) of the sinkers (7), but the base wire (in nylon)
must not absolutely be deposited in such a plane: such a condition can be obtained by modifying, if necessary, the
position "7" of the step-by-step motor of the plate ring (1), by means of keyboard function n. 174, bearing in mind
that said position corresponds to approximately 170 steps.

NOTE: In the machine program, reserve positions "6", "8", "9", "10", "11", "12", "13", "14", and "15" are available. ", Which
can be used for particular working conditions.

6-21
 Figure 6.9.2

6-22

6.10 CENTERING AND FASADURE OF THE TRANSFER PLATE ARM

Referring to figure 6.10, for the centering and fastening of the transfer plate arm (1), proceed as follows:

WARNING : The centering and fastening operations of the transfer plate arm (1) must be carried out with the same
transfer plate arm lowered, with the pneumatic piston (2) activated and with the part (3) correctly
inserted.
If the transfer plate arm (1) must be lowered, if it is in the lifting position, it is necessary to
determine, first, the activation of the pneumatic piston (2), then the correct insertion of the
particular (3), by actuating the cylinder advancement handle (as described in paragraph 4.4) or by
pressing the black button ( JOG ) on the control panel.

a) In the condition in which the teeth of the two copies (4) and (5), of bevel gears, coincide with each other,
contemporaneously, in the areas marked by the fastening points, the axis (X) of the plate shaft of transfer (6),
perpendicular to the piece (D), must be aligned with the two marked walls (S), of the cylinder, as illustrated in
detail (A).

b) The aforementioned condition is obtainable, completely unscrewing the screws (7), fixing the transfer plate
arm (1), raising the latter so that the toothed wheel (8) stands out from the toothed wheel from which it receives
the movement, and reintroducing the transfer plate arm (1) in the seat itself, after having varied the engagement
position of the toothed wheel (8); at this point, disassemble the transfer plate group of the machine, inserting
the gauge (C) in the internal crown (ring) of the plates; the calibrator (C) corresponds to the following codes:

- 093-0580-01-9, for machine with cylinder diameter 4 ";

- 064-2187-00-9, for machine with cylinder diameter 3 "¾
- 064-1532-00-9, for machine with cylinder diameter 3 "½.

After having inserted the caliper (C) in the internal crown (ring) of the plates, lower and raise the transfer plate
arm (1), until the particle (9) passes freely between the centering hole of the caliper (C ). At the end of the
operation, loosen the screws (7), then remove the gauge (C) from the internal crown (ring) of the plates, finally,
reassemble the transfer plate group on the machine.
c) By rotating the cylinder, by means of the advance handle, start the machine cycle until the first transfer jacks
appear; At this point, check that two transfer jacks are inserted between two needles, slightly closer to the right
hand needle, with respect to the operator's position, that is, anticipated.
Register, if necessary, the aforementioned position by loosening the screws (10) that lock the registers
(11) and, successively, screwing or unscrewing the same registers, until determining the correct position of the
transfer jacks. Finally, loosen the screws (10) in the registers (11).

d) Check that, in the loading phase, the thread is always deposited in two transfer jacks, never in just one,
otherwise check that the transfer jacks with high heel are equal in number, or that there is no phase shift
between needles and jacks transfer.
The copies (4) and (5) of bevel gears must have a very light play between one gear and another, always avoiding
forcing.

e) The play between the two copies (4) and (5), of bevel gears, can be registered by first loosening the screw
(12) and successively eliminating the play, in excess, between the copies (4) and (5), moving in the two
eccentrics (13) and (14), after having loosened the respective fixing screws (15) and ( 16). At the end of the
registration, loosen the screws (15) and (16) and the screw (12).

NOTE: The pistons (F1) and (F2) and the pin (P), indicated in the figure, are mentioned in the "TABLE OF
  THE MANUAL LUBRICATION INTERVENTIONS ", of paragraph 5.3, for the relative operation
of greasing.

6-23
 Figure 6.10

6-24

6.11 TRANSFER PLATE GROUP REGISTRATION

Referring to figure 6.11, the registration of the transfer plate group must be carried out in the following way:

a) The distance (X), between the lower plane of the transfer jacks (1), coming out of the transfer plate (2), and the
upper plane of the plates (3), must be approximately 0.4 mm; Such value is obtainable by first loosening the
screw (4), locking the ring (5) and, successively, moving the registration ring (6). At the end of the operation,
loosen the screw (4) in the ring (5).

b) Activate the lower pneumatic piston (7) of the support (8), for the command of the two bolts (output and re-
entry transfer jacks) (9), then loosen the fixing nut (10), successively moving the screw register (11), until
determining, between the lower plane of the washer (12) and the upper plane of the plate (13), a clearance of
approximately 0.1 mm, and finally, re-lock the fixing nut (10) .

c) Check that, with the transfer plate (2) completely down, the mesh can pass freely between the same transfer
plate and the plates (3); this condition is obtainable by first loosening the fixing nut (14) of the screw (15), and
then operating on the latter. at the end of the operation, loosen the fixing nut (14).

d) The point furthest from the thread trimming knife (16), from the center of the transfer plate (2), must be
discovered by the distance (Z), equal to 0.3-0.4 mm with respect to the tooth of the thread trimming disk (17 ),
while with respect to the external diameter of the same tooth, the distance (W), equal to 0.3-0.5 mm, should be
shown, as illustrated in detail (A); Such values are obtainable by first loosening the bolt (19) fixing screw (18),
and varying the position of the latter around the seat itself, then re-locking the bolt (18) on the bolt (19 ) and
also loosen the screw (20), then moving the support (21) along the oval fixing guide itself, and finally, re-lock the
screw (20).

6-25
 Figure 6.11

6-26

6.12 REPLACING THE BEARING GROUP IN THE CYLINDER HOLDER

Referring to figure 6.12, the eventual replacement of the bearing (1), in the cylinder holder (2), must be carried out as
follows:

a) In the front external part of the base plate (3), a letter (*) is stamped, depending on the desired play by the
coupling of the bearing (1) with the relative seat in the cylinder holder (2). Each letter, among those indicated,
 corresponds to a code of the same bearing group: the possible cases are listed in the relative diagram, reported
below.

LYRICS (*) BEARING GROUP CODE (1)

A 138-1504-00-9

B 138-1503-00-9

C 138-1505-00-9

b) After having identified the letter (*), in the base plate (3), it is necessary to refer to the corresponding code of
the bearing group (1), indicated in the table previously reported: such code is necessary for its ordering and,
consequently , for the replacement of the bearing group (1).

Figure 6.12

6-27

6.13 EXTRACTION CYLINDER JACKS

Referring to figure 6.13, the extraction of the cylinder jacks (1) must be carried out in the following way:

a) By rotating the cylinder (2) by pressing the black button ( JOG ) on the control panel, bring the cylinder jack (1)
to extract, in correspondence of the area (N), in the lower layer ring (3 ); the zone (N) is located between the 3 ^
and 4 ^ feeding.
Using the clamp (P) (code 011-1043-00 -9), provided on request, bring the cylinder jack (1) to the lower bead (T),
pushing it upwards, as indicated by the arrow (a ), so that it is released from the litter ring (3).

b) Pull the cylinder jack (1) to the outside, as indicated by the arrow (b).
c) Pull the cylinder jack (1) downwards, extracting it, as indicated by the arrow (c).

NOTE: After having carried out any necessary operations to remove the jack
  cylinder (1), cylinder (2), reassemble correctly the same cylinder jack, replacing it if necessary.
necessary.
 

Figure 6.13

6-28

6.14 NEEDLE EXTRACTION

Referring to figure 6.14, the extraction of the needles (1) must be carried out in the following way:

a) By rotating the cylinder (2), by pressing the black button ( JOG ) on the control panel, bring the needle (1) to
extract, in correspondence of the area (S), in the upper plane of the base (3), between the 3 ^ and the 4 ^
feeding.
Using the clamp (P) (code 011-1043-00-9), provided on request, bring the needle (1) to the heel (T), pulling it
outwards, as indicated by the arrow (a).

b) Push the needle (1) downwards, passing, at the same time, the clamp (P) along the entire length of the stem of
the same needle, as indicated by the arrow (b).

c) Release the needle (1) from the springs that have it housed inside the relative channel (F) of the cylinder (2),
then pull the same needle, simultaneously, outwards and upwards, as indicated by the arrow (c), always
removing it with the tab (L) closed.
NOTE: After having carried out any operations necessary to remove the needle (1),
cylinder (2), correctly reassemble the same needle, replacing it, if necessary.
 

Figure 6.14

6-29

6.15 PLATINUM ESTRACTION

Referring to figure 6.15, the extraction of the plates (1), of the external crown (ring) plates (2), must be carried out as
follows:

a) By rotating the cylinder, by pressing the black button ( JOG ) on the control panel, bring the plate (1) to extract,
in correspondence of the area (S), on the plate ring (3), then, remove the protection door, always located in zone
(S) and put on the 4th power supply.
Using the clamp (P) (code 011-1043-00-9), provided on request, bring the plate (1) to point (D), pulling it
outwards, as indicated by the arrow (a).

b) Pull the platen (1) upwards, as indicated by the arrow (b).

c) Push the platen (1) towards the inside, removing it, as indicated by the arrow (c).

NOTE: After having carried out any operations necessary to remove the platen
  (1), of the external crown (ring) (2), reassemble the same plate correctly, replacing it, if
  necessary, after reassembling the protection door correctly, previously
disassembled, in the area (S) of the plate ring (3).
 
 Figure 6.15

6-30

7. SELF-DIAGNOSIS

This chapter deals with the possible causes of error or interruption of the machine, indicated with appropriate
messages on the display of the machine itself.

For each message, the probable causes and the relative corrective actions to activate are described: for references to
the Hardware part, see paragraph 3.3.3.

This chapter is subdivided into the following three parts:

7.1 SELF-DIAGNOSIS WHEN STARTING THE MACHINE

7.2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS DURING THE OPERATING CYCLE
7.3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS

7.1 SELF-DIAGNOSIS WHEN STARTING THE MACHINE

It is subdivided into the two parts described below, in paragraphs 7.1.1 and 7.1.2.

7.1.1 Controls Relating to Flash Memories and Card Configuration

A - In the event that the cards are not correctly configured, the Fail LED on the CPU card will flash.

B - During the FLASH memory test, the following appears on the machine display:

Check hardware in progress ....

If the loss (or total lack, for example, when they are turned on for the first time) of the data in the Flash memories is
detected, the programming procedure is immediately activated, and the following message appears on the display:

Load Program 0 ........

For the programming data loading procedures, through the serial interface, see function 999, described in paragraph
3.3.1.

NOTE: In the event that the loss of data from Flash memories is frequent or systematic, it is
 
CPU board needs to be replaced.
 7-1

B1 - Errors eventually indicated during the FLASH memory programming procedure

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

 
ERROR
               
100001 Unknown Trasmission He has been Send to the 1 - Make sure the floppy disk used
    machine a object no actually contain the file with the data for
recognized how file of FLASH memories.
   
    use for the  
   
programming of the 2 - Repeat the transmission procedure.
FLASH memories.
         
                3 - Use a different copy of the disc than
               
contains the file to transmit, as for the
                first it could be damaged.
       
100002 Rx block time_out A section was interrupted Repeat the transmission procedure; if he
   
transfer.    
error is frequent, or systematic, it is necessary
               
try on another machine; if the problem persists,
                it is necessary to try another UFD (or on another PC,
               
or transmit directly from another machine).

If the problem disappears, you need to:

               

- try to control the connections to the

               
               
RS 232 connector of the machine.

               
- try to replace the mounted "consolle" card
               
on the back of the operator panel.
             
100003 Rx max NACK error He transmitting   (personal As the previous
    computer - UFD - or other  

   
machine) and the machine in  
   
reception no   they can  
   
dialogue correctly.    
100004 Rx max ENQ error He transmitting   (personal As the previous
    computer - UFD - or other  

   
machine) and the machine in  
   
reception no   they can  
   
dialogue correctly.    
100005 Tx max NACK error He transmitting   (personal As the previous
    computer - UFD - or other  

   
machine) and the machine in  
   
reception no   they can  
   
dialogue correctly.    
100006 Tx max ENQ error He transmitting   (personal As the previous
    computer - UFD - or other  

   
machine) and the machine in  
   
reception no   they can  
   
dialogue correctly.    
100101 Not erased chip: (x) The memory chip (x) Try again; if the problem is frequent, or
    FLASH no comes steely systematic, it is necessary to replace the CPU card.
   
correctly.        
100102 Not programmed chip: (x) The memory chip (x) Try again; if the problem is frequent, or
   
FLASH no   comes systematic, it is necessary to replace the CPU card.
   
programmed correctly.  
100103 Global checksum error He has failed   he test Try to reprogram the memories; if he
(checksum) of content problem persists, the card needs to be replaced
   
FLASH memories. CPU.
 7-2

7.1.2 Active Diagnostics at Power Up or During the General Test (Function 146)

CODE ERROR MESSAGE  

PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ERROR
               
200 Input reread error I knowhe has indicated a If the problem is frequent, or systematic,
unplanned switching in check or replace the sensor connected to the input
   
   
a line of income.  
indicated and the relative wiring. Or, replace the
               
INTERFACE card
201 Data memory not initialized I know have lost Some Carry out function 150 and reset the
   
data in memory of memory.
   
machine.      
If the error repeats, check:

- the position of the BAT-ON jumper , on the CPU board

               
               
- the battery in the CPU card

               
Or try replacing the CPU card.
202 Interface board error: An error has been reported If the error repeats replace the card
 
PTM X during he access to the INTERFACE.
   
device PTMx (6840  
   
interface board).      
203 Interface board error: An error has been reported If the error repeats, replace the INTERFACE card
 
VIA during he access to the or the CONSOLLE card.
   
device VIA (6522  
   
consolle card)      
204 Interface board error: An error has been reported If the error repeats, replace the INTERFACE card
 
ACIA during he access to the or the CONSOLLE card.
   
device ACIA (6551  
   
consolle card)      
205 Interface board error: Pressure has been noted If the error repeats, replace the INTERFACE card
 
NUMERIC KEYBOARD unexpected of a key of the or the CONSOLLE card.
   
keyboard numeric (part Or replace the entire board.
   
left of the console)  
206 Interface board error: I knowhe has indicated a If the error repeats, replace the INTERFACE card
 
OPERATING KEY unforeseen pressure of a or the CONSOLLE card.
   
key operating keyboard Or replace the entire board.
   
(part right of the  
consolle)

7-3
 7.2 SELF-DIAGNOSIS DURING THE OPERATING CYCLE
The error messages are listed below , displayed in case of machine interruption, with the probable cause and corrective
actions .

Descriptions of causes and actions are excluded , when these are already individualized: by the same message.

CODE ERROR MESSAGE  

PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ERROR                
00 STOP movable tabs              
01 Programmable STOP 1              

02 Programmable STOP 2              
03 STOP heel needle              
04 STOP tabs 1 ^ feed.              
05 STOP tabs 3 ^ feed.              
06 STOP tabs 4 ^ feed.              
07 STOP knife              
09 Battery intervention provided The battery of If the battery intervention appears when the
  (to turn off press the F2 key) reserve why the tensionpower supply network is not effectively
   
the line was interrupted, or powered, check:
   
went down beyond 10% • that the mains voltage is inside the
   
of the nominal value.    
nominal values;
   
Yes the tension   comes • that the connection of the three phases is present
restored, the machine at 18 Vac to the stabilized Feeder, at
   
    is able to distribute internal electrical cabinet;
   
from the point where • that the fuses, present in the power supply
   
find.        
stabilized, are intact.
    If you want to turn off the   Or, replace the Stabilized Feeder.
   
machine is necessary  
Or, replace the INTERFACE card.
   
press the "F2" key.  
Note - If the signal to the intervention of the
               
battery appears during alternating movement,
                verify that the power supply network is no longer
               
particularly low (close to 90% of the value
                nominal) and is lowered further as a result of the peak
               
absorbed current during acceleration of the
               
alternate movement.
                In this case, possibly raise the net or introduce
               
a delay in recognizing the intervention of
                the battery, using function 172, following the
               
relative instruction.
10 Backup battery discharged A tession has been noted Leave the machine on for a few hours
    lower than the desired value, at to allow safe recharging of the
   
the connections of the 2 Check the connections between the batteries.
    12 Vdc batteries.     batteries and stabilized power supply.
               
Or, replace the batteries.
               
Or, replace the Stabilized Feeder.
eleven STOP hood The bell, for expulsion Verify the operation of the sensor by
   
of the sock has open keyboard function 141 and correct programming
    in a part where it is in the "sensor box" of the article.
   
it must be closed.    
14 STOP oil pressure              
 
insufficient              
fifteen Elastic STOP 2              

16 Elastic STOP 1              
17 Programmable STOP 3              
18 STOP high transfer plate              
19 STOP thermal motor He has been intervened a Check that the motor contactor is activated when
STOP alarm drive protection in he "start" command.
     
    drive of the motor or Verify, at the time of activation of the
   
the thermal motor  
remote control the presence of three-phase power supply
                156 Vac upon input of the
               
motor. Check that the red led on the
               
motor drive; if the problem persists
                replace the drive. Check the lock
from the motor thermal contact.

7-4

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

ERROR                    
twenty STOP heel retriever                  
twenty-one STOP thermal vacuum cleaner              
If the vacuum cleaner is indeed very
                 
hot:  
- make sure that the vacuum cleaner is
                   
powered correctly at 3 phases;
                 
- make sure there are no impediments or
                 
constrictions that impede the normal flow of
                 
aspiration.  
                 
Otherwise, check the connections of the
                 
temperature sensor, between the vacuum cleane
                 
the electrical cabinet.  
                 
Check that the sensor works well.  
                 
Or replace the interface card .  
22 STOP air pressure                  
 
insufficient                  
2. 3 STOP low oil level                  
33 Engine acceleration error During  
the phase of Check the correct operation of the motor
 
mesh control curing of engines passo-passo using keyboard function 144;
   
passo-passo, the engine of if the passo-passo motor has difficulty
   
mesh width control has not movement, it is necessary:  
   
been able to get under the sensor    
   
zero. It is likely that - verify the presence of event
   
during the movements of the mechanical obstacles;  
   
cilco sock I knowbe there - check the connections between the mo
   
carried   in a position passo-passo and the command module;
   
different from the programmed - try to replace the passo-passo motor ;
                 
- try to replace the command module, by
                 
internal electrical cabinet.  

                 
If the passo-passo motor works properly,
                 
it is necessary to verify the correct operation
                 
from the “zero” sensor, through function 140; in
                 
in case of doubt it is necessary:  

                 
- check that there are no motor movements
                 
programmed in very close positions
                 
between these (e.g .: at the end of a zone and
                 
beginning of the next one);  
                 
- try to adjust the sensor;  
                 
- try to replace the sensor;  
                 
- try to control the connections to the
                 
sensor.  

                 
O well:  

                 
- check the connection ( flat cable) between the
                 
INTERFACE card and the P / P Motors module
                 
- check the position and insertion of the
                 
connection points on the INTERFACE card.
                 
- replace the INTERFACE card  
                 
- Replace the P / P Motors module.  
3. 4 Check motor control error During  
the phase of as the previous  
 
valve curing of engines    
   
passo-passo, the engine of the    
   
valve   aspiration has not    
   
been able to get under the sensor    
   
zero. It is likely that    
   
during the movements of the    
   
cycle sock I knowbe there    
carried   in a position
       
different from the programmed

7-5

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

   
ERROR
                     
35 Check motor control error During the   phase of as the previous
 
platinum ring curing of engines    
   
pp, ring motor    
plates no I have reach
       
   
under the zero sensor. It is    
   
probable than during the    
   
movements  
of the cycle    
   
sock has been worn in    
a different position than    
               
 scheduled
36 Control positioning error During the   phase of as the previous
 
mesh curing of engines    
   
pp, the control motor    
width has come ahead
       
   
zero sensor before    
   
planned. It is possible that    
   
during the movements of    
   
cycle cancetín I know be there    
   
carried in a position    
   
different than programmed    
37 Motor positioning error During the   phase of as the previous
 
valve control curing of engines    
   
pp, valve motor    
   
of aspiration he has arrived    
   
ahead of zero sensor    
   
ahead of schedule. It is    
   
probable than during the    
   
movements  
of the cycle    
   
sock has been worn in    
   
a different position than    
   
scheduled            
38 Motor positioning error During the   phase of as the previous
 
plate ring control curing of engines    
   
passo-passo, the engine of also:
   
ring platinasha arrived    
   
ahead of zero sensor Check that an excessive reduction in the
   
ahead of schedule. It is mesh does not impede the movement of the ring
   
probable than during the plates, causing engine damage.
   
movements  
of  
cycle    
   
sock has been worn in    
   
a different position than    
   
scheduled            
40 Encoder zero sensor With the machine in start, If the error repeats, but the engine and cylinder
 
not indicated for 4 seconds it does not come depart regularly and rotate approx. 4 seconds:
   
zero signal indicated - check the wiring to the encoder.
   
encoder          
- replace the encoder.
                   
- replace the interface board.

If the engine does not start:

                   

- check the value of the programmed speeds

                   
                     
in the article.
                   
- check and replace the motor drive
                   
- check if the motor turns.
                   
- or replace the interface card.

         
41 Machine item An attempt has been made to send •Check the type of the article (it is enough
 
not coherent in execution a Article  
connect the terminal, launch the EDITOR, and
   
SPONGE in a machine  
select <article in execution>; in the
   
with   plates   for mesh  
last line of the window with the article data
   
LISA or vice versa.      
and displayed the SPONGE or SMOOTH type.
   
(He control is carried out • Check, by means of function 150 the type of
   
alone in articles created  
plates programmed into the machine.
   
with release 2.1 or    
   
successive)            
42 STOP button Upon activation If the STOP button is not pressed, check:
 
still oppressed of the cycle (buttons START, • the operation of the button contact;
   
JOG or FAN ON key), • the connections to the button, either previous or
   
it was still there oppressed the  
rear, or the connection point on the card
   
previous STOP button or  
intercablaje, if the posterior button is missing.
later Or replace the interface board.

7-6

CODE ERROR MESSAGE  

PROBABLE CAUSE      
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ERROR                        
43 Post stop / zero At the time of If the STOP / ZERO command is not successfu
 
tadavia oppressed activation  
of the   cycle oppressed, control:
     
(buttons START, JOG or     
     
key FAN ON),  
tadavia • the operation of its contact
I was oppressed he command,
           
     
STOP C ERO command • the connections to the command.
on the back button Or replace the interface card.
         
44 Thread not cut Error relative to the   sensor If the message repeats and the thread become
sensor no. XX electronic of the yarn      
     
     
number XX. The machine has • Check that the values programmed in the
     
indicated a course of    
function 174 are not too low; the value
     
unmarked thread during    
normally used is 5.
self-learning cycle. • Carry out the procedure of
                        
 self-learning.
Four. Five Item not present or Has not been selected Select a new article using the function
not selected article or he selected keyboard 110
 
     
does not exist.              
46 Engine regulation data ERROR The regulation data of the Manually correct the data using the
     
motor  
brushless  
in keyboard function 150.
     
memory of reservation are     
     
altered              
47 Control ERROR The sock has not been Verify the operation of the sender by means of
 
cancetín passage expelled in the area of keyboard function 141 and correct programmin
     
control scheduled in he in the "sensor box" of the article.
"picture sensors " of the
          
     
Article              
48 Motor drive ERROR A protection intervened in Check that the motor contactor is activated wh
 
brushless or thermal intervention motor drive "start" command.
 
motor  
or intervened he thermal Verify, at the time of activation of the
internal to the engine. remote control the presence of the triphase supply
          
                    
220 Vac at motor drive input.
                    
Check that the red led on the
                    
motor drive: if problem persists,
                    
replace the same drive.
                    
Check that the contact of the circuit breaker is
                    
motor.
49 Broken threadsensor no. Error relative to the   sensor If the message is repeated and the thread is no
electronic of the yarn      
       
     
number XX. The machine has • Check that the values programmed in the
     
pointed a thread stopped no    
function 174 are not too low; the value
     
signaled during the cycle    
normally used is 5.
     
self-learning.     
• Carry out the procedure of
                        
self-learning.
fifty Wrong number of needles or The Check the number of needles programmed
 
missing  
number of needles, or using function 150 and correct the value.
     
programmed     
no Or check that the article has been created by th
corresponds to the Article number of machine needles, in which the
       
     
selected.       
been loaded.
51 ERROR: remove the handle The button has been pressed If the handle is actually inserted or the
     
"START" or the black "JOG" cover is not in the headquarters itself operate
     
with the bracelet  
still consequence. If mechanically everything is
     
inserted or with the lid not correct check the activation of input n. 4 relativ
     
correctly introduced to the sensor (Hall) that controls the introducti
     
in the appropriate venue.  
cover in the seat itself; in cases of not correct
                    
activation try to:
                    
•   regulate the sensor;
                    
• check the wiring of the sensor in the cabine
                        
electric;
• replace the sensor.
                      
52 Movement synchronism During the phase of If the error repeats, replace the interface board
 
alternated:  
alternating movement I don't know     
 
end of trajectory error has signaled the end sign     
of pendolación

7-7

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

ERROR
             
53 Zero synchronism The impulse counter Beyond a hardware problem, the error can
 
wrong encoder encoder is out of phase be caused by imperfect programming of the
   
relative to the zero signal. article: if the error always appears in the
             
same area of the sock, check that in such
             
position the thread guide and
             
the typology are entered in the correct
             
sequence (for example, there must not be two
             
configurations, from the same table, programmed
             
in the same turn and in the same angular position).

O well:
             

             
- If the error is occasional, it could be caused by
             
electrical disturbances generated by excessive
             
electrostatic charges accumulated in the
             
yarns, especially if they are synthetic and the
             
climate is particularly dry. In that case
make sure the ground connection of the
             
 cone holders and supports
             
ceramics in which the
             
yarn.

             
- If the error is systematic:
             
check the connection to the encoder;
             
replace the same encoder and carry out
             
again the relative fasaturation, as it is
             
described in chapter 6;
             
replace the INTERFACE card .
54 Watch-dog intervention It is intervened a If the error is respective, or systematic, replace the
drive security hardware for INTERFACE card ;
 
   
to disable    
he replace THE MOTOR DRIVE .
   
drive Brushless  
   
that powers the engine of the  
   
cylinder.        
55 Security intervention It is intervened a If the error is repetitive, or systematic, replace the
 
drive security hardware for INTERFACE card ;
   
to disable    
he replace THE MOTOR DRIVE.
drive Brushless
     
   
than feeds the engine of the  
cylinder.

7-8

CODE ERROR MESSAGE  

PROBABLE CAUSE  
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ERROR                           
58 Elaboration ERROR He code  
XXX may Control scheduling using the Editor
Item: XXX assume the following articles; see paragraph 3.3.2.
       
   
values:                   
For errors 1 to 6 check the association
                          
1,2,3,4,5,6 =   One of     the of the drawing thread guide using the graphics system.
   
drawings associates to the  
       
     
article contains data  
     
wrong relative to the  
     
programming of     the  
     
drawing thread guide.       
   
35 = the  
     
start or stop of a  
He drew   in a turn
         
     
greater than the length of  
     
area.                 
   
36 = ha been   scheduled  
     
a setting  
of  
     
the thread guides during  
     
turn of entry or  
     
departure of the movement  
alternate in a
               
     
position        
angular  
non-existent (higher   of  
     
 259 ° for entry or
     
greater than 184 ° for  
     
departure ).                 
   
37 = as for code 36  
     
but relatively to  
     
typologies.         
   
38 = the  
     
moving entrance  
     
alternate outside of   the  
     
turns of change.       
   
39 = input velocity  
     
in        
movement  
alternate it is very
           
     
elevated.    
(higher     of  
150 rpm).
                    
   
48 = the  
     
extended heel, but the  
memory of the card
         
     
He drew no provides is  
     
possibility. In     the  
     
card,    
mount     the  
     
version 2.1 or later,  
     
or remove   he heel  
     
extended.             
   
50 = in calibration phase  
     
(tarature)  
have been  
scheduled the two
         
values of the width
           
     
measured      
(L1 = L2)  
equal among these.
           
   
60 = in the typologies, they have  
been scheduled
             
     
contemporaneously  
     
the   bolts  
needles  
     
"Unloaded" (column  
     
as 12 and 13) and "sponge  
     
schedule" (column  
fifteen)  
     
of the 2 ^ feeding.  
   
61 = in the typologies, has  
been programmed one
         
     
of the two movements  
of the "camón training
       
     
mesh"  
of the     2^  
     
feeding (columns  
     
9 and 10) but not to  
     
"anticipation      
camón  
training mesh"
             
(column 8).

7-9

CODE ERROR MESSAGE  

PROBABLE CAUSE    
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ERROR                    
59 **** LM628 ERROR **** An error has been reported • Check the correct power supply, at 220 Volt -
code: XX during the management of the 3-phase, motor drive
   
circuit command of the "Brushless".
     
   
machine motor.    
• Verify correct assembly and correct
   
The code "XX" has the  
encoder connection.
   
following meanings:  
• Check the correct connection of the motor, be it
   
A0, A1, A3 = command  
the power part, that the Hall sensors.
    unknown      
    A4 = error during the Check the absence of overloads •
    mechanical during motor rotation.
 

   
writing of commands and • Replace the interface card.
    data          
• Replace the encoder.
   
    A5 = error during reading • Replace the motor drive.
    status and data    
A6 = data not congruent • Replace the motor.
   
   
with the command to perform    
   
A7 = zero encoder no    
   
indicated during the start    
alternate movement
         
   
B2   = position   of    
   
movement alternate    
   
inaccurate           
   
B3 = maximum error    
   
dynamic lm628 passed    
   
(wrap around)          
   
B4 = phase shift between    
   
theoretical and actual position of    
   
motor              
B5 = interrupt of lm628 no
               
 provided
60 24V voltage failure ERROR The test in the Check the presence of the 24 Vdc voltage, in the
   
presence of voltage +24 connector P28 (1-2) of the INTERFACE board, but
   
Vdc, in the card consider that such a voltage is selected by the
   
INTERFACE      
relay K2, on the “Intercablaje” card; such relay clo
only after the completion of the diagnosis
                 
             
initial and slows down in case of errors
   
             
from the "Drawing" card IPB-48.
   
                 
Yesthe voltage is regular at connector P28,
                 
replace the INTERFACE card.
                 
If the voltage is not present check:
                 
- the connections between the “Intercablaje” card
                 
stabilized feeder.
                 
- the connections between the “Intercablaje” card
                 
INTERFACE card.
                 
- correct activation of relay K2 on the card
                 
"Intercablaje".
                 
The integrity of resistor R5, on the board
                 
"Interleaving" or replace stabilized feeder.
61 12V voltage missing ERROR The test has been canceled in Check the presence of such a voltage in the
   
the presence of tension Stabilized Feeder output: if absent,
   
+12 Vdc, on card also unplugging the cable to the card
   
INTERFACE.      
“Interface”, replace the stabilized feeder. Yes,
                 
instead, the voltage is lowered only when it is
                 
present the connection to the card
                 
INTERFACE, in this case there is a short circuit
                 
on a sensor (eg spinning progress sensor) or
                 
a cable to the machine: disconnect all
                 
cables to the machine, until the cause is found
                 
of decomposition.
                 
Check the presence of voltage (12 Vdc) on the
                 
connector P19 (3-4) of the INTERFACE board; yes
                 
attention is present, but the error persists,
                 
replace the same INTERFACE card.
62 Earth test ERROR Noted the lack of the Check the ground connection, yellow / green wire
   
ground zero of the appropriate connecting sheet in the
of the voltage 24 Vdc. feeder. or replace the interface card.

7-10

CODEX ERROR MESSAGE  

PROBABLE CAUSE  
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS
ERRORE                  
63 Battery discharged on card The voltage of the battery Replace the battery.
 
CPU reserve, CPU, has been If decomposition persists, also replace
pointed out outside of the CPU card.
     
   
allowed limits.      
65 ERROR preset encoder to zero The machine   no he has The error could be caused by programming
   
managed correctly the commands of the typologies or of the
   
the encoder pulses. very close to each other in an area where
                 
machine runs at very high speeds.
                 
Or replace the INTERFACE card.
66 Movement synchronism During  
the phase of If the error persists, check the mechanica
 
alternated: alternate movement I don't know encoder, or replace the interface card.
 
zero encoder error has pointed out the sign of  
   
zero encoder before  
end sign pendolation
       
67 Engine acceleration timeout The pp motors have not been See everything that is described for errors
 
passo-passo steely  
correctly, 35 - 36 - 38.
   
but the machine has not  
   
been able to identify the motor  
   
pp by default.        
68 SPI reread error Output n. XXX no Referring to the general electrical scheme
 
exit n. XXX works correctly.  
of the machine, check that the actuator
                 
(typically a solenoid valve) connected to t
                 
designated outlet, is regularly connected a
                 
that the coil is not interrupted or shorted
                 
circuit.
Check the integrity of the fuses that protect
                 
                 
the supply of the indicated solenoid valve
                 
Or replace the SPI 16/13 module.
                 
Or replace the INTERFACE card.
                 
Note - If the error is signaled by an output
                 
reserve, not connected to any load, disabl
                 
diagnoses it using function 131, as is
 described in paragraph 3.3.1.
69 Blade position error The saw blade graft Check for mechanical causes.
 
thread trimmer thread trimmer is not in the Check the correct operation of the relative
   
programmed position  
sensor.
70 Data memory error! The data in memory of Carry out function 150 and reset all
 
Carry out the procedure reserves are altered.  
correct data.
 
n.150              
If the malfunction recurs:
                 
- check and if necessary replace the batte
                 
on the CPU board.
                 
- check the correct introduction of the jum
                 
BAT-ON , on the CPU board.
                 
Or replace the CPU card.
72 Clock WATCH circuit error The test in the If the error recurs, replace the CPU card.
 
DOG on CPU card oscillator of the circuit of  
security in the CPU
       
74 ATTENTION blade in function! At the push of the button Check for mechanical causes.
 
Check junction and sensors START, with the plate Check the correct operation of the relative
   
transf. gotten up, the disc sensor.
   
thread trimmer it's found in  
work position
         
75 ATTENTION the article is in An attempt has been made to send If the article is compatible it is enough to
 
compatible with the version of the in execution a Article "Modification" of the article through the ed
 
machine! created on a machine video terminal and also exit without doing
earlier version. modification (in this way the machine perf
         
                 
an automatic conversion of the article).
                 
If the error persists, it means that the item
                 
effective in the current version of the mac
85 Setup error The card "Pattern" no If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
- pattern card - can be initialized at the beginning (IPB-48).
 
   
of the cycle. Must be turn off  
machine.

7-11

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

     
ERROR                        
86 Unknown command error The card "Pattern" he has If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
- pattern card - answer with a code (IPB-48).
   
   
non-existent.              
87 Selector power error Lack of voltage 24 Volt, Replace the fuse that was interrupted and also,
 
group or interruption of the fuse check, the presence of voltage 24 Volt.  
 
- pattern card - relative  
to the   group of      
   
power indicated on the      
   
message.                
88 Encoder zero error not signaled The card "Pattern" no Check the correct wiring connection of the
 
- pattern card - receives the “Zero encoder between the “Pattern” card and the card
   
Encoder " or   of "Zero INTERFACE.  
   
Cylinder".          
If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
(IPB-48).
                     
89 Encoder test error Enter one "Zero" of the cylinder If the error recurs:  
 
- pattern card - and the next, it has not      
   
counted  
he number of - check the correct connection of the wiring of the
   
planned needles.        
encoder between the “Pattern” card and the card
                     
INTERFACE;  
                   
- try to replace the Pattern card (IPB-48);
                   
- replace the encoder.  
90 Oscillator error The current oscillator If the error repeats replace the Pattern card (IPB-
- pattern card - of maintenance no 48).
     
   
works, or   no   is      
   
calibrated correctly.      
91 Data request error The “Pattern” card has not If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
 
- pattern card - order correctly the (IPB-48).  
   
drawing data to card      
   
CPU.                  
92 Data supply error The master has not satisfied If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
 
- pattern card - requests for data from (IPB-48).  
   
part of the CPU board.        
93 Data area violation error The master has written to If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
 
- pattern card - outside of the area   of (IPB-48).  
   
memory to this reserved.      
94 Dual_port RAM error An error has been verified If the error recurs, replace the Pattern card
- pattern card - in the memory part (IPB-48).  
         
 RAM, common to the slave and the
master.

7-12

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

       
ERROR
                        
95 Decomposition driver d Decomposition to a driver Identify driver “ d ” from group “ g ”, possible
 
group g    
(circuit integrated of kind decomposition, with the following method:
   
- pattern card -  
CA3272 or DN4027) on the - group 1 → 1 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
         
“Pattern” card and on - group 2 → 2 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
         
relative modules of - group 3 → 3 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
expansion. - group 4 → 4 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
               
- group 5 → reverse “Harting” actuator.
                   

Carry out the manual test, of the group indicated in the

                   
                   
message, using keyboard function 147.
                   
In order to clearly identify the exact nature of the
                   
problem, you need to consult the schematic
                   
general electrical of the machine and the scheme
                   
electrical, specific, of the Pattern card (IPB-48).
                   
In order to identify the component to replace,
                   
it is necessary to proceed as follows:
                   
Control actuator coils, connected
                   
with the driver, bearing in mind that each driver
                   
is intended for two-cam piloting and that the
                   
first driver always commands the first two
                   
cams up; solenoids must have a
                   
resistance between 30 and 38 ohm.
                   
If the coils are integral, that means that
                   
the decomposition interests the drivers or the card
                   
Pattern (IPB-48).
                   
Normally, for actuator groups 1, 2, 3 and
                   
4, you need to proceed as follows:
- if driver “ d ” is n. 1, or n. 2, replace the
                   
                     
Pattern card (IPB-48);
                   
- if driver “ d ” is n. 3, or n. 4, replace the
                     
actuator driver module "g";
                   
- if you are interested the actuator group n. 5 is
                     
need to replace:

                     
. the driver module of cams 1-4, in the case
                     
that the driver “ d ” is the n.1, or the n. two;
 
                     
. the driver module of cams 5-8, in the case
                       
that the driver “ d ” is n.3, or n. Four.
96 Solenoid interrupted cam l One of the solenoids " L " = cam, from n. 1 to n. 8, marked (cam no.1 is
 
group g    
(UP / DOWN), of the cam Always the first up).
   
- pattern card -  
indicated,    
result " G " = stakeholder group concerned:
               
disrupted. - group 1 → 1 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
                   
- group 2 → 2 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
                   
- group 3 → 3 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
- group 4 → 4 ^ power “Harting” actuator;
                   
                   
- group 5 → reverse “Harting” actuator.
                   
Carry out the manual test, of the group indicated in the
                   
message, using keyboard function 147.
                   
If the error recurs, check the integrity of the
                   
coil relative to the target cam.
                   
If the coils are integral, that means that
                   
decomposition controls drivers or card
                   
Pattern (IPB-48).
                   
Normally, for actuator groups 1, 2, 3 and
                   
4, you need to proceed as follows:
                   
- if driver “ d ” is n. 1, or n. 2, replace the
                     
Pattern card (IPB-48);
                   
- if driver “ d ” is n. 3, or n. 4, replace the
                     
actuator driver module " g ";
                   
- if you are interested the actuator group n. 5 is
                     
need to replace:
                     
. the driver module of cams 1-4, in the case
                       
that the driver “ d ” is the n.1, or the n. two;
                     
. the driver module of cams 5-8, in the case
that the driver “ d ” is n.3, or n. Four.

7-13

CODE ERROR MESSAGE PROBABLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

     
ERROR
                          
97 Solenoid in short cam l One of the   solenoids Verify the error, performing the manual test, of the
group g (UP / DOWN), of the cam group indicated in the message, using the function
       
 
- pattern card -  
indicated, result in short keyboard 147.
         
circuit.          
If the error recurs, check the integrity of the
                       
coil relative to the target cam.
                       
If the cones are intact, in this case, the
                       
decomposition interests the drivers or the card
                       
Pattern (IPB-48).
                       
Normally, for actuator groups 1, 2, 3 and
                       
4, you need to proceed as follows:

- if driver “ d ” is n. 1, or n. 2, replace the

                         
                         
Pattern card (IPB-48);
 
                       
-  if driver “ d ” is n. 3, or n. 4, replace the
                           
actuator driver module "g";
                       
- if you are interested the actuator group n. 5 is
                           
need to replace:

. the driver module of cams 1-4, in the case

                         
                           
that the driver “ d ” is the n.1, or the n. two;
                           
. the driver module of cams 5-8, in the case
                           
that the driver “ d ” is n.3, or n. Four.
98 Timeout in command of The “Pattern” card has not Check the error by performing the manual test,
 
diagnostic      
responded to a command of group indicated in the message, using the function
 
- pattern card -  
diagnosis of the card keyboard 147.
         
CPU            
If the error recurs, check the integrity of the
                       
bibina relative to the cam in object.
                       
If the coils are integral, that means that
                       
decomposition interests the drivers or the card
                       
Pattern (IPB-48).
                       
Normally, for actuator groups 1, 2, 3 and
                       
4, you need to proceed as follows:

- if the driver is n. 1, or n. 2, replace the card

                       
                           
Pattern (IPB-48);
                       
- if the driver is n. 3, or n. 4, replace the
                           
actuator drivers module;
                       
- if you are interested the actuator group n. 5 is
                           
need to replace:

. the driver module of cams 1-4, in the case

                         
                           
that the driver “ d ” is the n.1, or the n. two;
                         
. the driver module of cams 5-8, in the case
that the driver “ d ” is n.3, or n. Four.
                           
99 Wrong needle number drawing An attempt was made to     
XXXXXXXX    
He drew XXXXXXXX, created
              
 by a machine that has
         
a number of needles     
         
different of the machine in     
         
which is being worked on     
100 Drawing XXXXXXXX  
An attempt was made to     
 
not present in memory  
He drew   XXXXXXXX, no     
         
present in the memory of     
machine

7-14

CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN DRIVERS AND ACTUATOR CAMS FOR CONFIGURATION AT 4 LEVELS

Actuator group no. one Driver one => cams 1 and 2
  Driver two => cams 3 and 4
Actuator group no. two Driver one => cams 1 and 2
Driver two => cams 3 and 4
Actuator group no. 3 Driver one => cams 1 and 2
Driver two => cams 3 and 4
Actuator group no. 4 Driver one => cams 1 and 2
  Driver two => cams 3 and 4
Actuator group no. 5 Driver one => cams 1 and 2
Driver 2 => cams 3 and 4
“Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Power Section A / LK
“Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Power Section B / J1
“Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Power Section C / J2
“Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Power Section D / J2
Driver module
P16 connector (CMD5-8D)

     
CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN DRIVERS AND ACTUATOR CAMS FOR CONFIGURATIONS A 6 AND 8
LEVELS
       
  Driver one => cams 1 and 2 “Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Actuator group no. one Driver two => cams 3 and 4 Power Section A / LK
  Driver 3 => cams 5 and 6 Driver module
Driver 4 => cams 7 and 8 P10 connector (CMD5-8A)
 
  Driver one => cams 1 and 2 Scheda "Pattern" (IPB-48)
Actuator group no. two Driver two => cams 3 and 4 Power Section B / J1
  Driver 3 => cams 5 and 6 Driver module
  Driver 4 => cams 7 and 8 P12 connector (CMD5-8B)
  Driver one => cams 1 and 2 “Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Actuator group no. 3 Driver two => cams 3 and 4 Power Section C / J2
  Driver 3 => cams 5 and 6 Driver module
Driver 4 => cams 7 and 8 Connector P14 (CMD5-8C)
 
  Driver one => cams 1 and 2 “Pattern” card (IPB-48)
Actuator group no. 4 Driver two => cams 3 and 4 Power Section D / J2
  Driver 3 => cams 5 and 6 Driver module
Driver 4 => cams 7 and 8 P16 connector (CMD5-8D)
 
  Driver one => cams 1 and 2 Driver module
Actuator group no. 5 Driver 2 => cams 3 and 4 Connector P15 (CMD9-12C)
  Driver 3 => cams 5 and 6 Driver module
  Driver 4 => cams 7 and 8 Connector P17 (CMD9-12D)

7.3 SELF-DIAGNOSIS ACTIVATED BY KEYBOARD FUNCTIONS

Function 146 activates the General Test sequence of the Electronic part of the machine, as described in paragraph
3.3.1.

The error signals during the general test are those already described in the previous pages, in particular 7.1.
7-15